Yamaha Electronic Keyboard DGX 630 User Manual

Owner’s Manual  
Keyboard Stand Assembly  
For information on assembling the  
keyboard stand, refer to the instructions  
on page 10 of this manual.  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION  
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO  
Battery Notice:  
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one  
described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-  
mended by Yamaha.  
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if  
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-  
tery is approximately five years.When replacement becomes necessary,  
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.  
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could  
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any  
kind.The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use  
an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18  
AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-  
dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.  
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these  
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a  
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being  
charged.  
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries  
of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or  
incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.  
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a  
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is  
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-  
pany the accessory product.  
Warning:  
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-  
ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-  
lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of  
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.  
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:  
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the  
time of printing. However,Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify  
any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing  
units.  
Disposal Notice:  
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason  
its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,  
state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that  
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist  
you, please contact Yamaha directly.  
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-  
phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that  
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods  
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you  
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an  
audiologist.  
NAME PLATE LOCATION:  
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before  
damage occurs.  
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-  
ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.  
You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-  
chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-  
nent record of your purchase.  
SomeYamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting  
fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-  
ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or  
installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fix-  
tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.  
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other  
uses are recommended.  
NOTICE:  
Model  
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a  
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not  
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners  
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer  
before requesting service.  
Serial No.  
Purchase Date  
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:  
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-  
mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-  
tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with  
both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the  
following:  
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL  
92-BP (bottom)  
2
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)  
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If  
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!  
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-  
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not  
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by  
the FCC, to use the product.  
2. IMPORTANT:When connecting this product to accessories and/  
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s  
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation  
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC  
authorization to use this product in the USA.  
3. NOTE:This product has been tested and found to comply with the  
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital  
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-  
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential  
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-  
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies  
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in  
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation  
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does  
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be  
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-  
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:  
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by  
the interference.  
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or  
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.  
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the  
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the  
lead-in to co-axial type cable.  
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,  
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of  
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact  
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600  
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620  
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by  
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.  
(class B)  
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.  
OBSERVERA!  
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT  
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)  
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den  
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.  
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,  
sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også  
selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.  
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America  
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.  
90620  
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko  
laitetta verkosta.  
Telephone : 714-522-9011  
Type of Equipment : Digital Piano  
Model Name : DGX-630/YPG-635  
(standby)  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and  
2) this device must accept any interference received including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is  
suspected.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM  
Connecting the Plug and Cord  
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-  
dance with the following code:  
* This applies only to products distributed by  
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.  
(FCC DoC)  
BLUE  
: NEUTRAL  
BROWN : LIVE  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may  
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals  
in your plug proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-  
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-  
minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.  
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of  
the three pin plug.  
• This applies only to products distributed by  
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.  
(2 wires)  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
PRECAUTIONS  
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING  
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.  
WARNING  
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical  
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:  
Power supply/AC power adaptor  
Water warning  
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required  
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.  
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet  
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into  
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the  
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have  
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.  
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)  
only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or  
overheating.  
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.  
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have  
accumulated on it.  
Fire warning  
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,  
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects  
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll  
anything over it.  
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.  
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.  
If you notice any abnormality  
Do not open  
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a  
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or  
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,  
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected  
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.  
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or  
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it  
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it  
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.  
CAUTION  
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage  
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:  
Power supply/AC power adaptor  
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally  
fall over.  
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold  
the plug itself and not the cord.  
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.  
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is  
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off  
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power  
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum  
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug  
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.  
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during  
electrical storms.  
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.  
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the  
outlet.  
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or  
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the  
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.  
Location  
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or  
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to  
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal  
components.  
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,  
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio  
may generate noise.  
(3)-11 1/2  
4
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Saving data  
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the  
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all  
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes  
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume  
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.  
Saving and backing up your data  
• The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory  
when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the  
Registration Memory (page 90.)  
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save  
important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a  
computer (pages 99, 100, 110).  
Maintenance  
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,  
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  
Backing up the USB storage device/external media  
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you  
save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.  
Handling caution  
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.  
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel  
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the  
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified  
Yamaha service personnel.  
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might  
discolor the panel or keyboard.  
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not  
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.  
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a  
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing  
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a  
physician.  
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.  
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.  
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long  
time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.  
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your  
instrument.  
Trademarks  
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
®
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
(3)-11 2/2  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Copyright Notice  
The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this  
electronic keyboard:  
Mona Lisa  
Can’t Help Falling In Love  
from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.  
Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans  
Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation  
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved  
from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII  
Words and Music by George David Weiss,  
Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore  
Copyright © 1961 ; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP)  
Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane  
Music Publishing Company, Inc.  
Composition Title : Against All Odds  
Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403  
Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD  
AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD  
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved  
All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public perfor-  
mance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.  
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it  
has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI  
files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use  
is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE  
ILLEGAL COPIES.  
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited  
except for your personal use.  
Panel Logos  
GM System Level 1  
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music  
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM  
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.  
XGlite  
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.  
Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that  
some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control  
parameters and effects.  
XF  
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and  
open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file con-  
taining lyric data is played.  
STYLE FILE  
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-  
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.  
USB  
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with  
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-  
puter is on).  
6
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing  
the Yamaha DGX-630/YPG-635 Portable Grand!  
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument  
in order to take full advantage of its various features.  
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,  
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.  
Included Accessories  
The DGX-630/YPG-635 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.  
• Music rest  
• Accessory CD-ROM  
• Owner’s manual (this book)  
• Keyboard stand  
• Footswitch  
• AC Power Adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)  
* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Special Features of the DGX-630/YPG-635  
Graded Hammer Standard Keyboard  
Thanks to our experience as the world’s leading manufacturer of acoustic pianos, we’ve developed a  
keyboard with action that’s virtually indistinguishable from the real thing. Just as on a traditional acous-  
tic piano, the keys of the lower notes have a heavier touch, while the higher ones are more responsive  
to lighter playing. The keyboard’s sensitivity can even be adjusted to match your playing style. This  
Graded Hammer technology also enables the DGX-630/YPG-635 to provide authentic touch in a light-  
weight instrument.  
Performance assistant technology  
Page 39  
Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect  
performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do  
is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the  
keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in  
time with the music.  
All you need is  
one finger!  
And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply  
by tapping one key.  
Play a Variety of Instrument Voices  
Page 19  
With the DGX-630/YPG-635, the instrument voice that sounds when you  
play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive  
range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for  
example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of  
musical variety.  
Play Along with Styles  
Page 28  
Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.  
The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-  
ering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and  
much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-  
iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.  
Easy Performance with Music Notation Display  
Page 37  
When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the  
display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If  
the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear  
on the score display.  
* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display func-  
tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.  
8
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm  
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,  
Saving User Files (Registration Memory) to  
CHORD/FREE Type—  
CHORD/MELODY—  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Setting Up  
Keyboard Stand Assembly  
CAUTION  
Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand.  
These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and oth-  
ers. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use.  
• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the  
sequence given below.  
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.  
• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.  
• Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop.  
• Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or overturn,  
the keyboard to drop, or injury.  
• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object drop-  
ping or the stand overturning.  
• Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop.  
• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the key-  
board may drop, or may result in injury to the user.  
• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.  
Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.  
z The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly  
instructions and select the parts as needed.  
Assembly Parts  
1
Back board  
q Joint connectors (4 pcs.)  
w 6 x 70 mm roundhead  
screws (4 pcs.)  
Side  
boards  
e 6 x 30 mm roundhead  
screws (4 pcs.)  
Stand  
bases  
r Support rail  
t 4 x 45 mm flathead screws  
(6 pcs.)  
y 5 x 16 mm roundhead  
screws (4 pcs.)  
Use the packing sheet to protect both the instrument and  
the floor when assembling.  
* The sheet is the bag in which the instrument is wrapped.  
10 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Up  
x Attach the stand bases.  
2
Insert the joint connectors q into the stand boards as  
shown. The joint connectors have been installed properly if  
you can see the screw head on the connector.  
q Joint connectors  
NOTE  
• If you put the connectors in wrong direction and want to take them out,  
tap around the holes on the boards.  
Attach the stand bases to the bottom of the side boards,  
using the screws w. The left and right stand bases are the  
same shape, and there is no difference between their front-  
to-back orientation. If you have trouble fastening the  
screws, use a screwdriver to rotate the joint connectors so  
that the connector holes are aligned with the screw holes  
on the stand bases.  
w 6 x 70 mm  
roundhead screws  
c Attach the back board.  
e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screw  
3
Attach the back board, using the screws e. Check the  
back-to-front orientation for the side boards. Make sure the  
non-colored surface is facing down.  
CAUTION  
• Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fit-  
tings.  
NOTE  
• If you have purchased an optional pedal unit, attach the pedal unit  
before proceeding to the next step. Refer to the instructions provided  
with your pedal unit.  
v Attach the support rail.  
4
Spread the packing sheet on the floor. Place the instru-  
ment on the sheet with the rear panel side on the bottom.  
Align the support rail r into the groove on the bottom  
of the instrument and attach the rail, using the screws t.  
r Support rail  
NOTE  
t 4 x 45 mm  
flathead  
screws  
• If you don’t have the packing sheet, use a thick blanket or other soft  
material to protect the floor and the instrument.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up  
b Put the keyboard on the stand.  
Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and care-  
fully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move  
the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the key-  
board are properly aligned with the holes on the angle  
brackets.  
5–6  
CAUTION  
• Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught  
between the keyboard and the stand parts.  
n Install the keyboard to the stand.  
Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the screws  
y.  
y 5 x 16 mm  
roundhead  
screws  
Post-assembly checklist  
Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the fol-  
lowing points:  
• Are there any parts left over?  
If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct  
any errors you might have made.  
• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable  
fixtures?  
If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location.  
• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you  
play it or move it?  
If so, properly tighten all screws.  
• Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or  
seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to  
the assembly instructions and diagrams and  
retighten all screws.  
12 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up  
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.  
Power Requirements  
Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the  
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.  
instrument is set to STANDBY.  
CAUTION  
• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,  
or during electrical storms.  
WARNING  
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recom-  
mended byYamaha) only.The use of other adaptors may  
result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the  
instrument.  
Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.  
AC power  
AC outlet  
adaptor  
Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.  
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)  
WARNING  
• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-  
ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be  
damaging to your hearing.  
CAUTION  
• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external  
devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to  
observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment  
damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their  
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while  
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.  
The instrument speakers are automatically shut off  
when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/  
OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You  
can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard  
amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other  
line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output  
signal to that device.  
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)  
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain  
as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha  
FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain  
on and off.  
NOTE  
• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-  
TAIN jack before turning on the power.  
• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this  
changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed  
footswitch operation.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Setting Up  
Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack)  
This jack is for connecting an optional LP-7 pedal  
unit. When connecting the pedal unit, make sure to  
also assemble the unit on the supplied keyboard  
stand.  
NOTE  
• Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting  
the pedal.  
Keyboard  
Stand  
LP-7  
(optional)  
Pedal Unit Functions  
The optional pedal unit has three foot pedals that produce a range of  
expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic  
piano. The pedal unit does not affect the split voice when the keyboard is  
in split mode.  
Damper (Right) Pedal  
The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an  
acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain  
longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained  
notes.  
A “half-pedal” effect lets you use the damper pedal to create partial  
sustain effects, depending on how far down you press the pedal.  
When you press the damper  
pedal here, the notes you play  
before you release the pedal  
have a longer sustain.  
* When using both the foot switch and pedal unit, the last effect applied takes  
priority.  
Sostenuto (Center) Pedal  
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto  
pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you  
hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subse-  
quently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to  
sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”  
When you press the sostenuto  
pedal here while holding the  
note, the note will sustain as  
long as you hold the pedal.  
Soft (Left) Pedal  
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of  
notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect  
notes that are already playing when it is pressed.  
14 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Up  
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)  
Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-  
minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance  
data and song files between the two (page 105). To use  
the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-  
lowing:  
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-  
ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable  
to connect the instrument to the computer. After  
making the connections, turn the instrument’s  
power on.  
• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.  
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on  
Turning the Power On  
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-  
UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]  
switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]  
switch again to turn the power OFF.  
Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instru-  
ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data  
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are  
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is  
turned on.  
CAUTION  
• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is  
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are  
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the  
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.  
CAUTION  
• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message  
is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory  
and result in a loss of data.  
Music Rest  
Insert the music rest into  
the slots as shown.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Panel Controls and Terminals  
Front Panel  
Song Category List  
Style Category List  
u
i
o
e
q
y
!
!
r
t
!
w
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Front Panel  
q [STANDBY/ON] switch............................page 15  
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ...........pages 15, 66  
! [START/STOP] button ...............pages 27, 34, 67  
@ [SONG] button........................................ page 33  
e FILE CONTROL [MENU],  
@ [EASY SONG  
[EXECUTE] buttons.......................pages 96–102  
ARRANGER] button............................... page 58  
r [LYRICS] button.......................................page 38  
t [SCORE] button.......................................page 37  
y [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button............................page 40  
u [DSP ON/OFF] button..............................page 73  
i [MUSIC DATABASE] button....................page 57  
o [FUNCTION] button.........................pages 68, 92  
@ [STYLE] button....................................... page 27  
@ [VOICE] button........................................ page 19  
@ Dial....................................................pages 67, 92  
@ CATEGORY [ ] and [  
]
buttons.............................................pages 67, 92  
@ Number buttons [0]–[9],  
[+] and [-] buttons............................pages 67, 92  
! LESSON [L], [R],  
@ [DEMO] button........................................ page 35  
@ [EXIT] button........................................... page 68  
[START] buttons......................................page 51  
! [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .............page 24  
! [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................pages 34, 75  
@ REGIST MEMORY  
[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons......... page 90  
! SONG MEMORY  
# [PORTABLE GRAND] button................. page 22  
# [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................... page 21  
# [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................... page 20  
# [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ................. page 70  
# [PITCH BEND] wheel.............................. page 74  
# Drum Kit.................................................. page 23  
[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons ......................page 61  
! [REPEAT & LEARN]/  
[ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................pages 56, 28  
! [A-B REPEAT]/  
[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............pages 88, 79  
! [REW]/  
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...............pages 34, 79  
The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and  
percussion instruments assigned to the keys when  
“Standard Kit 1” is selected.  
! [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button...............pages 34, 81  
! [PAUSE]/  
[SYNC START] button.....................pages 34, 80  
16 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                       
Panel Controls and Terminals  
Display  
Music Database List  
Voice Category List  
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
#
#
#
#
@
#
#
Rear Panel  
#
#
#
#
$
$
Rear Panel  
# CONTRAST knob ....................................page 69  
# PEDAL UNIT jack.................................... page 14  
$ PHONES/OUTPUT jack .......................... page 13  
$ DC IN 12V jack........................................ page 13  
# USB TO DEVICE terminal........................page 97  
USB TO HOST terminal.........................page 105  
# SUSTAIN jack...........................................page 13  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Changing the Display Language  
Quick Guide  
This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display  
language.The default display language is English, but if you switch to  
Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be  
displayed in Japanese where appropriate.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of  
times until the “Language” item appears.  
The currently selected display language will appear below the “Lan-  
guage” item.  
When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the lan-  
guage as required.  
Language item  
The currently selected  
language  
Select a display language.  
3 The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese.  
The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so  
that it is retained even when the power is turned off.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
4
18 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices  
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,  
this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,  
strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide vari-  
ety of musical sounds.  
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN  
This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.  
Press the [VOICE] button.  
1 The main voice selection display will appear.  
The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.  
The currently  
selected voice num-  
ber and name  
Select the voice you want to play.  
2 While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-  
able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice  
selected here becomes the main voice.  
For this example select the “105 Flute” voice.  
Select 105 Flute  
Play the keyboard.  
3
Adjusts volume.  
Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices  
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL  
You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.  
The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.  
Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.  
1 The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.  
When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN dis-  
play. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the  
main voice when you play the keyboard.  
Voice Number  
Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than  
a second.  
2
The dual voice selection display will appear.  
Dual voice selection display  
The currently selected dual voice  
Hold for longer than a second  
Select the desired dual voice.  
3 Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you  
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.  
For this example try selecting the “123 Vibraphone” voice.  
20 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices  
Play the keyboard.  
4
Two voices will sound at the same time.  
Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT  
In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main  
and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split  
point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 82).  
Split point  
Split voice  
Main voice and dual voice  
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.  
1 The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When  
turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The  
currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split  
point.  
Voice Number  
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than  
a second.  
2
The split voice selection display will appear.  
Split voice selection display  
The currently selected split  
voice  
Hold for longer than a second  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices  
Select the desired split voice.  
3 Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you  
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice  
which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example  
try selecting the “041 Folk Guitar” voice.  
Play the keyboard.  
4
Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
Play the Grand Piano Voice  
When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.  
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.  
NOTE  
The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.  
• When you press the [PORTA-  
BLE GRAND] button all settings  
other than touch sensitivity are  
turned off. The dual and split  
voices will also be turned off, so  
only the Grand Piano voice will  
play over the entire keyboard.  
22 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fun Sounds  
This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can  
use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and  
much more.These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.  
Drum Kits  
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other  
normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at  
different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound  
of a different drum or percussion instrument.  
Drum Kit Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 19)  
1 Press the [VOICE] button.  
2 Use the dial to select “131 Standard Kit 1”.  
3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!  
Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percus-  
sion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll  
hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a  
comprehensive variety of drum and percussion  
sounds. For details on the instruments included  
in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 131 to  
142), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 132.  
Sound Effects  
The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 141 and 142). When  
either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.  
Sound Effect Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 19)  
1 Press the [VOICE] button.  
2 Use the dial to select “142 SFX Kit 2”.  
3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!  
As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a  
submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many  
other useful effects. “141 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning,  
running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do  
not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore pro-  
duce no sound.  
For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit  
voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum  
Kit List” on page 133.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
The Metronome  
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo  
and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most com-  
fortable for you.  
Start the Metronome  
Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [MET-  
RONOME ON/OFF] button.  
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button  
again.  
4/4  
Current setting  
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo  
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo set-  
ting.  
1
Tempo  
Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280.  
2
24 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The Metronome  
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat  
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.  
Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for  
longer than a second to select the function “Time Signa-  
ture–Numerator”.  
1
Numerator  
(Number of  
beats per  
Denominator  
(The length of  
one beat.)  
Hold for longer  
measure.)  
than a second  
NOTE  
Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure.  
2 The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example.  
A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure.  
• The metronome time signature  
will synchronize to a style or  
song that is playing, so these  
parameters cannot be changed  
while a style or song is playing.  
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times  
as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Sig-  
nature–Denominator”.  
3
Use the dial to select the beat length.  
4 Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter  
th  
note, eighth note, or 16 note). Select 8 for this example.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Metronome  
Setting the Click bell sound  
This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Bell  
item.  
2
You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell  
sound on or off.  
3
Adjusting the Metronome Volume  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Met-  
ronome Volume item.  
2
Metronome volume  
Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required.  
3
26 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Playing Styles  
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces  
accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to  
match chords you play with your left hand.You can select from 160 dif-  
ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures  
(see page 134 for a complete list of the available styles).  
In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.  
Select a Style Rhythm  
Most styles includes a rhythm part.You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro  
trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played  
using percussion instruments only.  
Press the [STYLE] button.  
1 The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number  
and name will be highlighted.  
The currently selected style  
Select a style.  
2 Use the dial to select the style you want to use.  
NOTE  
• Style files transferred from a  
A list of all the available styles is provided on page 134.  
computer or stored on a USB  
flash memory device connected  
to the instrument can be  
selected and used in the same  
way as the internal Styles (Style  
numbers 161–). File transfer  
instructions are provided on  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
3 The style rhythm will start playing.  
NOTE  
• Style numbers 131, 143–160  
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop  
have no rhythm part and there-  
fore no rhythm will play if you  
playback.  
use them for the above exam-  
ple. For these styles first turn  
auto accompaniment on as  
[START/STOP] button, and the  
accompaniment bass and chord  
parts will begin playing when  
you play a key to the left of the  
keyboard split point.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Styles  
Play Along with a Style  
You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.  
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-  
paniment that you can play along with.  
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.  
1
Turn automatic accompaniment on.  
2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.  
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment  
off.  
This icon appears when  
automatic accompani-  
ment is on.  
NOTE  
• The keyboard split point can be  
changed as required: refer to  
When automatic accompaniment is on ...  
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54: F#2) becomes the  
“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the  
accompaniment chords.  
Split point (54: F#2)  
Auto accompaniment region  
Turn sync start on.  
3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.  
Flashes when sync start  
is on.  
28 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing Styles  
When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a  
style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard  
split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function  
off.  
Play a left-hand chord to start the style.  
4 You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.  
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-  
ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.  
The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you  
play.  
Try this!  
Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 30. These  
examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progres-  
sions sound good with the styles.  
Split point  
Auto accompaniment region  
Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody  
with your right hand.  
5
Split point  
Auto accompaniment region  
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback  
when you’re done.  
6
You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.  
Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 79.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Styles  
Styles Are More Fun WhenYou Understand Chords  
Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.  
In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord  
sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same  
chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall  
feel of the music you play.  
On page 28 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital  
to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take  
your accompaniments to a new level.  
On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the  
instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively  
creating a complete song.  
Playing the Chord Progressions  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
Play the scores with the left hand.  
* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to  
produce the chord progressions.  
Split point  
Play to the left of the split point.  
Recommended Style  
041 Euro Trance  
—Dance music with simple chords—  
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
F
C
G
Am  
This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start  
again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button  
and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.  
30 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing Styles  
Recommended Style  
148 Piano Boogie  
—3-chord boogie-woogie—  
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
C
F
C
C
G
F
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the  
progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!  
Recommended Style  
096 Bossa Nova  
—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—  
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
Dm  
G7  
CM7  
FM7  
5
Am  
A7  
Bm7  
E7  
This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When  
you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing Styles  
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords  
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:  
Easy Chords  
Standard Chords  
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering.  
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 28). The keyboard to the left of the  
split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area  
of the keyboard.  
Split point (default: 54/F#2)  
b
b
#
#
b
b
b
#
F
D
E
F
G
B
D
E
C D E F G A B C D E F  
Accompaniment  
range  
Root notes and the corresponding keys  
Easy Chords  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
Standard Chords  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
This method lets you easily play chords in the  
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only  
one, two, or three fingers.  
This method lets you produce accompaniment by  
playing chords using normal fingerings in the  
accompaniment range of the keyboard.  
How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]  
C
)
(
9
)
C(9  
• To play a major chord  
Press the root note of the chord.  
C6  
C6  
C
Cm  
(
)
(
)
)
C(b5  
9
#11  
CM7  
CM7  
CM7  
Caug  
Cm6  
• To play a minor chord  
Press the root note together with the  
nearest black key to the left of it.  
(
)
b5  
C7  
CM7  
Csus4  
CM7aug  
Cm7  
• To play a seventh chord  
Press the root note together with the  
nearest white key to the left of it.  
(
)
9
Cm  
Cm  
Cm7  
• To play a minor seventh chord  
Press the root note together with the  
nearest white and black keys to the left  
of it (three keys altogether).  
(
)
(
)
(
)
9
11  
9
Cm7  
Cm7  
CmM7  
Cdim  
CmM7  
Cdim7  
(
)
(
b5  
)
b5  
Cm7  
CmM7  
(
)
(
)
(
)
b9  
b13  
9
C7  
C7  
C7  
C7  
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
#11  
13  
#9  
b5  
C7  
C7  
C7  
C7  
C7aug  
C7sus4  
Csus2  
* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords  
will be recognized without them.  
32 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Using Songs  
With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a  
piece of music.You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,  
or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the  
performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more.The  
songs are organized by category.  
In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly  
describe the 30 songs provided.  
Song  
Listen  
Lesson  
Record  
Select and Listen to a Song  
Press the [SONG] button  
1 The song selection display will appear.  
The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.  
The currently selected song  
number and name  
NOTE  
Select a song.  
You can also play songs you  
have recorded yourself (User  
Songs) or songs that have been  
transferred to the instrument  
from a computer in the same  
way that you play the internal  
songs.  
2 Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 35.  
Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.  
The song highlighted here  
can be played  
001–030  
031–035  
User Songs (Songs you record yourself).  
USB flash memory connected to the instrument (page 96)  
036–  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Using Songs  
Listen to the song.  
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.  
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-  
ton again.  
Song start!  
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause  
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],  
rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.  
REW  
FF  
PAUSE  
Press the fast  
reverse button to  
rapidly return to an  
earlier point in the  
song.  
Press the fast for-  
ward button to rap-  
idly skip ahead to  
a later point in the  
song.  
Press the pause  
button to pause  
playback.  
Change the Song Tempo  
You can change the song tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will  
appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to  
anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.  
You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
34 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Using Songs  
Play the Demo Song  
Press the [DEMO] button.  
The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding  
instrument voices provided!  
The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has  
played all the way through. You can stop demo playback at any time by  
pressing the [START/STOP] button.  
Song List  
These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature,  
songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-  
gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.  
Category  
No.  
Name  
Suggested Uses  
CHORD  
1
2
JetSet  
The songs in this category have been created to give  
you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this  
instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with  
the various features.  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
Winter Serenade  
Take off  
Main Demo  
3
4
Live! Grand Demo  
These songs features some of the instrument’s many  
useful voices. They make maximum use of the  
characteristics of each voice, and might serve as  
inspiration for your own compositions.  
5
Live! Orchestra Demo  
Cool! RotorOrgan Demo  
Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo  
ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo  
Hallelujah Chorus  
Voice Demo  
6
7
8
9
Use these songs to experience some of the  
instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for  
the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the  
performance assistant technology feature.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Ave Maria  
Function Demo  
Piano Solo  
Nocturne op.9-2  
For Elise  
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as  
lesson songs.  
Maple Leaf Rag  
Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair  
Amazing Grace  
CHORD  
CHORD  
Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)  
Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.  
Scarborough Fair  
A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also  
well suited for use as lesson songs.  
Piano Ensemble  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
CHORD  
Old Folks at Home  
Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)  
Ep Ballad  
Boogie Woogie  
Rock Piano  
When you need to practice backing (accompaniment)  
patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is  
ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band.  
These songs allow you to practice backing parts one  
hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to  
master this important skill.  
Salsa  
Piano  
Accompaniment  
Country Piano  
Gospel R&B  
Medium Swing  
Jazz Waltz  
Medium Bossa  
SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George  
David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)  
CHORD  
30  
CHORD  
: Includes chord data.  
The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song  
Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.  
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same  
as the original.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Songs  
Types of Songs  
The following three types of songs can be used by the DGX-630/YPG-635.  
Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.  
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.  
External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.  
to transfer the songs to the instrument.  
The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song  
files from storage to playback.  
Computer  
Song  
USB flash memory  
Song  
Your own  
performance  
Connect  
Record  
Transfer  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Song  
Storage locations  
Preset Songs  
(001–030)  
User Songs  
(031–035)  
Flash Memory  
Song  
USB  
(036–)  
The 30 songs built  
into the instrument.  
Song  
Song  
Save  
Play  
NOTE  
• User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file  
to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing  
score display and can be used with the lesson features.  
NOTE  
• Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files  
transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the exter-  
nal song file flash memory area, and vice versa.  
36 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Songs  
Displaying the Song Score  
This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.  
Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB ash  
memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory.  
Select a song.  
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 33.  
Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will  
appear.  
2
NOTE  
There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.  
These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.  
• Both chords and lyrics will be  
shown in single-staff score dis-  
play of a song that includes  
chord and lyric data.  
• When there are many lyrics they  
may be displayed in two rows a  
measure.  
• Some lyrics or chords may be  
abbreviated if the selected song  
has a lot of lyrics.  
• Small notes that are hard to  
read may be easier to read after  
you use the quantize function  
Single-staff  
Marker  
Melody score  
Chord  
Lyrics  
NOTE  
Double-staff  
• No chords or lyrics are shown  
on the double-staff.  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
3 The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of  
the score to indicate the current location.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
4
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Songs  
Display the Lyrics  
If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.  
No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.  
Select a song.  
1 Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2  
NOTE  
• Songs downloaded from the  
described on page 33.  
Internet or commercially avail-  
able song files, including XF for-  
compatible with the lyrics dis-  
play features as long as they are  
standard MIDI file format files  
Press the [LYRICS] button.  
2 The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display.  
containing lyric data. Lyrics dis-  
play may not be possible with  
some files.  
NOTE  
• If the lyrics display shows gar-  
bled characters, try changing  
Song title, lyricist,  
and composer.  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
3 The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the  
display.  
The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song.  
Lyrics and chord  
display  
Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display  
Number  
016  
Name  
Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)  
020  
Against All Odds (Collins 0007403)  
030  
Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)  
38 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature  
that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even  
though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any  
notes and still sound good!You could even just tap one key and the  
results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and  
can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.  
Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results  
for you.  
Chord...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-bal-  
anced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play  
anything with both your left and right hands.  
Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-  
hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the  
left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to  
support the melody you are playing with your right hand.  
Split point  
Play your own melody with the right hand.  
Melody................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any  
keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve  
never played a keyboard instrument before!  
Chord/Melody.... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand  
section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the  
keyboard using the Chord type.  
Split point  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.  
1 This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.  
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-  
formance assistant technology feature is on.  
The currently  
selected type  
Select the CHORD type.  
2
Hold for longer than a second  
Select Chord  
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so  
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the  
Chord type by using the dial.  
Select a song.  
3 Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a  
NOTE  
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave  
Maria”.  
When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song  
can be seen in the display!  
The song displayed here will  
be played.  
What is a Song?  
You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term  
“Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance  
assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should  
40 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
4
5
Song playback will begin.  
The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for  
four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin play-  
ing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be  
shown in the display.  
Play on the keyboard.  
Before  
After  
NOTE  
Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the  
same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at  
measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right.  
Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will  
continue to “correct” the notes that you play.  
• The score for Ave Maria is pro-  
This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.  
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]  
button.  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance  
assistant technology feature off.  
6
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-  
ogy type is normally shown.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.  
1 This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.  
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-  
formance assistant technology feature is on.  
The currently  
selected type  
Select the CHORD/FREE type.  
2
Hold for longer than a second  
Select  
Chord/Free  
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so  
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the  
Chord/Free type by using the dial.  
Select a song.  
3 Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a  
NOTE  
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Noc-  
turne”.  
The song displayed here will  
be played.  
42 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
4
Song playback will begin.  
The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.  
Play on the keyboard.  
5 Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of  
the split point with your left hand.  
Split point  
With this type notes played on the  
left-hand side of the split point will  
actually sound an octave higher.  
NOTE  
Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-  
A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the  
display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your  
left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music.  
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.  
• The score for Nocturne is pro-  
Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand  
part in the display.  
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]  
button.  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance  
assistant technology feature off.  
6
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-  
ogy type is normally shown.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
MELODY Type—Play with One Finger  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.  
1 This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.  
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-  
formance assistant technology feature is on.  
The currently  
selected type  
Select the MELODY type.  
2
Select Melody  
Hold for longer than a second  
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so  
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Mel-  
ody type by using the dial.  
Select a song.  
3 Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a  
NOTE  
song by using the dial.  
The song displayed here will  
be played.  
44 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
4 Song playback will begin.  
Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not  
sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5).  
Song start!  
Play on the keyboard.  
5 To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one fin-  
ger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If  
you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE]  
button to call up the melody score in the display.  
Sounds like a  
melody!  
How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger  
thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type!  
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]  
button.  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance  
assistant technology feature off.  
6
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-  
ogy type is normally shown.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.  
1 This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.  
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-  
formance assistant technology feature is on.  
The currently  
selected type  
Select the CHORD/MELODY type.  
2
Hold for longer than a second  
Select  
Chord/Melody  
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so  
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the  
Chord/Melody type by using the dial.  
Select a song.  
3 Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a  
NOTE  
song by using the dial.  
The song displayed here will  
be played.  
46 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Press the [START/STOP] button.  
4
Song playback will begin.  
The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memoriz-  
ing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth mea-  
sure.  
Play on the keyboard.  
5 Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of  
the split point with your left hand.  
Split point  
With this type notes played on the  
left-hand side of the split point will  
actually sound an octave higher.  
Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand.  
You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split  
point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases  
with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song  
melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your  
left hand.  
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.  
If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the  
[SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.  
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]  
button.  
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance  
assistant technology feature off.  
6
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-  
ogy type is normally shown.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!  
Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.  
If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the  
keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-  
hand section of the keyboard.  
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands  
spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately  
with your left and right hands (any notes will do).  
The chord information  
included in the song is  
displayed in the lower  
area of the MAIN display.  
You will get even better  
results if you match your  
left-hand rhythm to rhythm  
of the chord indicator in  
the display.  
Sounds like you’re  
playing the right  
notes!  
How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you  
play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type!  
Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of  
playing produce different results.  
Play with the left and right hands  
at the same timing—type 1.  
Play with the left and right hands  
at the same timing—type 2.  
Play alternately with the left  
and right hands—type 3.  
Play 3 notes at once  
with your right hand.  
Play 1 note at a time with your right  
Play 3 notes at once  
with your right hand.  
hand (for example: index finger  
middle finger ring finger).  
Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a  
melody with your right ... or any other combination.  
48 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Easy Way to Play Piano  
Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type.  
If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen  
score feature.  
Displaying the Score.  
After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 44, press the [SCORE] button.  
The melody score will appear.  
Appears when the performance  
assistant technology is on  
Marker  
Chord  
Melody  
The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.  
If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score  
you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.  
Play while watching the  
marker  
Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology.  
When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that  
include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only  
work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first  
select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the  
[SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If  
melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any  
combination type that includes the Melody type.  
External Songs and the performance assistant technology.  
Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as  
long as they include the required chord and/or melody data.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Yamaha Education Suite  
You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or  
both-hands lesson.You can also use songs (only SMF format 0/1)  
transferred to the instrument from a computer. (page 108) During the  
lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play  
wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can han-  
dle. It’s never too late to start learning!  
Lesson Flow:  
Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!  
Select the part you  
Select the  
song you  
want to work on  
(right hand, left  
hand, both hands).  
Select lesson  
1, 2, or 3.  
Lesson  
start!  
want to learn.  
The practice methods:  
Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.  
Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.  
Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.  
50 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Lesson 1—Waiting  
In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you  
play the right note.  
Select a song for your lesson.  
1 Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want  
to use for your lesson. As listed on page 35 there are a variety of song  
types.  
Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
2
Select the part you want to practice.  
3 Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand  
lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-  
hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right cor-  
ner of the display.  
Select R for right-hand lesson.  
Select L for left-hand lesson.  
Select LR for bothhands lesson.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Start Lesson 1.  
4 Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the  
LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in  
sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Lesson 1 ... An  
explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few  
seconds before the lesson begins.  
In this case the “R1” indicates that right-  
hand lesson 1 has been selected.  
(Lesson 1)  
(Lesson 2)  
(Lesson 3)  
(Song Lesson off)  
Song playback will begin automatically when you select  
Lesson 1.  
Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played  
is indicated by a dot () on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen  
keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the  
next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the  
correct note. The triangular marker () above the score indicates play-  
back progress.  
Marker  
Left-hand part  
Right-hand part  
Marker  
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)  
52 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Shifting the keyboard left or right.  
The hidden (  
) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by  
pressing the [+] or [-] button.  
The displayed range (61 keys)  
Actual keyboard range (DGX-630/YPG-635 = 88 keys)  
61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-630/  
YPG-635 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or  
low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be  
shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or  
right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard  
left or right so you can see the notes (the marker will appear on the  
appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the  
keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson.  
Stop the Lesson mode  
5 You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/  
STOP] button.  
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.  
See HowYou’ve Done  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
When the lesson song has played all the way  
through your performance will be evaluated in 4  
levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent.  
“Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.  
NOTE  
After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again  
from the beginning.  
• The evaluation feature can be  
turned off via the FUNCTION  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Lesson 2—Your Tempo  
Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed  
you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own  
pace.  
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and  
3 on page 51).  
1
Start Lesson 2.  
2 Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are  
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-  
son 1 ...  
In this case the “R2” indicates  
that right-hand lesson 2 has  
been selected.  
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is  
selected.  
The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to  
indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct  
timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo  
will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original  
tempo.  
Play while following the  
score marker  
Left-hand part  
Right-hand part  
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)  
Stop the Lesson mode.  
3 You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/  
STOP] button.  
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.  
54 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Lesson 3—Minus One  
Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you  
have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.  
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and  
3 on page 51).  
1
Start Lesson 3.  
2 Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are  
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-  
son 1 ...  
In this case the “R3” indicates  
that right-hand lesson 3 has  
been selected.  
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is  
selected.  
Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard  
marker in the display will indicate the notes to play.  
Marker  
Left-hand part  
Right-hand part  
Marker  
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)  
Stop the Lesson mode.  
3 You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/  
STOP] button.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select a Song For a Lesson  
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn  
Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to  
repeatedly practice a section you find difficult.  
Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson.  
NOTE  
The song location will move back four measures from the point at  
You can change the number of  
which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-  
measures the Repeat and learn  
function jumps back by pressing  
a number button [1]–[9] during  
repeat playback.  
sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you  
pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-  
sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all  
you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you  
make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it  
right  
e Jump back 4 measures and  
repeat playback  
q
Song playback  
direction  
w
Press imme-  
diately  
Oops!  
A mistake!  
56 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Play Using the Music Database  
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to  
select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...  
simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database.The panel  
settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of  
sounds and style!  
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.  
1
A Music Database list will appear in the display.  
Select a Music Database.  
NOTE  
• Music Database (MDB) files  
transferred from a computer or  
stored on a USB flash memory  
device connected to the instru-  
ment can be selected and used  
in the same way as the internal  
Music Databases (MDB num-  
bers 301–). File transfer instruc-  
the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that  
matches the image of the song you intend to play.  
For this example select the “158 Patrol”.  
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your  
right.  
3
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the  
about playing chords.  
Split Point  
If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this  
point you can check the assigned voice and style.  
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.  
4
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Change a Song’s Style  
In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to  
play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature.This means that you  
can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova,  
as a hip-hop tune, etc.You can create totally different arrangements by  
changing the style with which a song is played.  
You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for  
a complete change of image.  
Try Out the Easy Song Arranger  
You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song.  
Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009  
Hallelujah Chorus.Press the [START/STOP] button begin  
playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song  
Arranger feature will appear on the display.  
NOTE  
As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall  
• The score for Hallelujah Chorus  
image of the song.  
Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other  
songs as well—any songs that include chord data.  
Using the Easy Song Arranger  
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.  
1 The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name  
and number will be highlighted.  
The currently selected song  
number and name are dis-  
played here.  
Select a Song.  
2 Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.  
58 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Change a Song’s Style  
Listen to the song.  
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move  
NOTE  
• When playing song numbers  
010, 011, and 020 to 030 while  
using the Easy Song Arranger,  
melody tracks will be automati-  
cally muted and no melody will  
sound. In order to hear the mel-  
ody tracks you will need to press  
the SONG MEMORY buttons [3]  
to [5].  
on to the next step while the song is playing.  
Song start!  
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.  
4 The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name  
and number will be highlighted.  
The currently selected style  
number and name are dis-  
played here.  
Select a style.  
5 Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.  
NOTE  
• Because the Easy Song  
As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only  
the styles change.  
Arranger uses song data you  
can’t specify chords by playing  
in the accompaniment range of  
the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/  
OFF] button will not function.  
Select a voice part.  
• If the time signature of the song  
and style are different, the time  
signature of the song will be  
used.  
6 If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a  
voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be  
selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button.  
The Melody R and Melody  
L displays will be selected  
alternately each time you  
press the [VOICE] button.  
The currently selected mel-  
ody voice will be displayed.  
Hold for longer than a second  
Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.  
NOTE  
7 Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody  
• If you press the [INTRO/END-  
ING/rit.] button during style play-  
back, the style will stop but the  
song will continue playing. Use  
the [START/STOP] button to  
stop playback completely.  
voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice  
changes.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
G
u
k
c
i
i
d
u
e
Q
Record Your Own Performance  
You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as  
user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved  
as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal  
songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB flash memory device, as  
described on page 100.  
Recordable Data  
NOTE  
5 melody tracks and 1 Style (chord) track can be recorded. To record your own  
performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to spec-  
ify the track(s) you want to record on.  
• Up to approximately 30,000  
notes can be recorded for the  
five user songs if you record  
only to the melody tracks.  
• User songs are saved as SMF  
(Standard MIDI File) format 0  
files. Refer to page 108 for infor-  
mation on SMF files.  
SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5]  
Record the melody parts.  
SONG MEMORY (Track) [A]  
Records the style pattern and chord parts.  
Melody  
Chords  
Specify track(s)  
and record  
Track  
1
Track  
2
Track  
3
Track  
4
Track  
5
Track  
A
Track Mute  
This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back  
while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 89).  
60 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Record Your Own Performance  
Recording Procedure  
From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use  
the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you  
want to record to.  
1
Rotate the dial to select a  
song number between 031  
and 035.  
Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your  
selection on the display.  
CAUTION  
• If you record to track that con-  
tains previously-recorded  
data the previous data will be  
overwritten and lost.  
2
Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track  
Together  
NOTE  
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-  
ing the [REC] button.  
Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.  
The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.  
• Style accompaniment is auto-  
matically turned on when you  
select the style track [A] for  
recording.  
• Style accompaniment cannot  
turned on or off while recording  
is in progress.  
Press and hold  
Record a Melody track  
NOTE  
• If style accompaniment is on  
and track [A] has not yet been  
recorded, the style track [A] will  
automatically be selected for  
recording when a melody track  
is selected. If you only want to  
record a melody track, be sure  
to turn the style track [A] off.  
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-  
ing the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual  
voice. Split voices cannot be recorded.  
The selected track will be highlighted in the display.  
To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a sec-  
ond time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while  
recording is in progress.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Record Your Own Performance  
Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.  
3 You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.  
NOTE  
• If the memory becomes full dur-  
ing recording a warning mes-  
sage will appear and recording  
will stop automatically. Use the  
song clear or track clear (page  
data and make more room avail-  
able for recording, then do the  
recording again.  
The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.  
Current measure  
Recording  
starts  
NOTE  
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]  
button.  
• If you press the [INTRO/END-  
ING/rit.] button while recording  
a style track, an appropriate  
ending pattern will play and then  
recording will stop.  
4
or  
When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001  
and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box  
border.  
Save the song.  
CAUTION  
5 When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save  
• The recorded Song data will  
be lost if you turn the power  
to the instrument off without  
executing the Save operation.  
the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or  
the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the  
song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035.  
If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message  
the song will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instru-  
ment’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of  
converting the song to a MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press  
and hold the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears,  
then press the [+/YES] button.  
62 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Your Own Performance  
To Record Other Tracks  
Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks.  
By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],  
[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded  
tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You  
can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track  
number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks.  
To Re-record a Track  
Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal  
way.  
The new material will overwrite the previous data.  
When the recording is done ...  
6
To Play Back a User Song  
User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 33).  
1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display.  
2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial  
to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.  
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.  
To save a User Song to USB flash memory page 100.  
Data that cannot be recorded  
• Split voice  
• The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes  
made during the song will not be recorded.  
Time signature, Style number, Style volume  
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs  
This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).  
NOTE  
• If you only want to clear a spe-  
cific track from a user song use  
the Track Clear function.  
From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you  
want to clear.  
1
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer  
than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.  
2
A confirmation message will appear on the display.  
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.  
Press and hold  
Hold for longer than a second  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Record Your Own Performance  
Press the [+] button to clear the song.  
3 The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while  
the song is being cleared.  
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song  
This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.  
From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you  
want to clear.  
1
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],  
[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for  
longer than a second.  
2
A confirmation message will appear on the display.  
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.  
Hold for longer than a second  
Press the [+] button to clear the track.  
3 The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while  
the track is being cleared.  
64 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Backup and Initialization  
Backup  
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you  
want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.  
The Backup Parameters  
• Registration Memory  
• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,  
Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection,  
Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering  
Initialization  
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default set-  
tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.  
Backup Clear  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user set-  
ting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the  
[STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the  
keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values  
restored.  
Flash Clear  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
To clear User Songs as well as Song, Style, and Music Database files  
that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer,  
turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simul-  
taneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three  
highest black keys.  
CAUTION  
• When you execute the Flash  
Clear operation, data you  
have purchased will also be  
cleared. Be sure to save data  
you want to keep to a com-  
puter.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Basic Operation  
Basic Operation  
Overall DGX-630/YPG-635 control is based on the following simple operations.  
1Press a button to select a basic function.  
2Use the dial to select an item or value.  
3Start a function.  
3Start a function.  
1Select a basic function.  
2Select an item or value.  
Volume Adjustment  
Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the  
instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones  
plugged into the PHONES jack.  
Rotate counter-  
clockwise to lower  
the volume.  
Rotate clockwise to  
increase the vol-  
ume.  
1Press a button to select a basic function.  
Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.  
Select an auto-accompaniment style.  
Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.  
66 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operation  
2Use the dial to select an item or value  
When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display.  
You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.  
The currently selected item is high-  
lighted in the display. In this example the  
[VOICE] button has been pressed.  
Changing Values  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
Dial  
CATEGORY [ ] and [  
]
Rotate the dial clockwise to  
increase the value of the selected  
item, or counterclockwise to  
decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial  
continuously to continuously  
increase or decrease the value.  
buttons  
Decrease  
Increase  
When selecting a song, style, or voice,  
you can use these buttons to jump to the  
first item in the next or previous cate-  
gory.  
Jump to the first item  
in the next or previ-  
ous category.  
The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for select-  
ing categorized items, as in the example below.  
[+] and [-] Buttons  
Press the [+] button briefly to incre-  
ment the value by 1, or press the [-]  
button briefly to decrement the  
value by 1. Press and hold either  
button to continuously increment or  
decrement the value in the corre-  
sponding direction.  
Example:VOICE SELECT Display  
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.  
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.  
Pressbriefly  
to decre-  
ment.  
Press briefly  
to incre-  
ment.  
Select the category shown  
here.  
Number Buttons [0]–[9]  
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song num-  
ber or parameter value.  
The first voice in the selected  
category is selected.  
Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see  
below).  
In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if  
you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select  
the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or  
[+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly  
handy when you have to select from a large number of voices.  
Example: Song number “003”  
can be entered in three ways.  
• [0] [0] [3]  
• [0] [3]  
(“003” will appear on the dis-  
play after a brief delay)  
• [3]  
(“003” will appear on the dis-  
play after a brief delay)  
In most procedures described throughout this owner’s  
manual the dial is recommended for selection simply  
because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection  
method. Please note however, that most items or values  
that can be selected using the dial can also be selected  
using the [+] and [-] buttons.  
Press number buttons  
[0], [0], [3].  
3Start a function.  
This is the [START/STOP] button.  
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]  
button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Basic Operation  
The Displays  
Display Names  
All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for differ-  
ent modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.  
MAIN Display  
Title  
To Return To the MAIN Display  
Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN  
display.  
You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the  
[EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel.  
FUNCTION Display (page 92)  
The FUNCTION display provides access to 50 utility functions.  
The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you  
can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 67) to select 50 different groups of functions. Press the  
CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the  
dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.  
Function item  
Value  
The “Press & Hold” Symbol  
The “  
” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that  
the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call  
up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a  
range of functions.  
68 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Basic Operation  
MAIN Display Items  
The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.  
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.  
* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on  
the rear panel of the instrument for opti-  
mum display legibility.  
A-B Repeat  
Appears when repeat  
playback is engaged.  
Tempo  
Transpose  
Measure Number  
Function ON/Off Icons  
Dual  
Appears when the Dual Voice is  
Chord  
Display  
on. When this icon is showing a  
second voice is “layered” on and  
played with the main voice.  
Split  
Appears when the Split Voice is  
on. When this icon is showing  
different voices can be played to  
the left and right of the keyboard  
split point.  
Style (Auto-accompaniment)  
Registration Memory  
Performance assistant technology  
Appears when the [ACMP ON/  
OFF] button is pressed to turn  
accompaniment on after selecting  
a style. When showing the key-  
board range to the left of the split  
point is used for accompaniment  
chord recognition.  
Shows the selected bank  
number.  
Appears when the performance  
assistant technology is on.  
Shows the memory num-  
bers that contain data. A  
border appears around  
the selected number.  
Harmony  
Appears when Harmony is on.  
When this icon is showing har-  
mony notes will be added to the  
main voice.  
Appears when the synchro-stop  
function is engaged.  
Song Track Status  
File Control  
When this icon is showing you  
can control file operations.  
The style pattern name.  
Highlighted during user song  
recording.  
The track(s) selected for  
recording are highlighted dur-  
ing user-song recording. Only  
tracks that contain data are dis-  
played. A border appears  
around a selected track that  
contains data. No border  
appears around a Muted track.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Reference  
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Play with a Variety of Effects  
Adding Harmony  
This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.  
Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button  
to turn Harmony feature on.  
1
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY  
ON/OFF] button again.  
Hold for longer than  
a second.  
The currently selected harmony type  
When harmony  
is on the har-  
mony icon will  
appear in the  
display.  
Use the dial to select a harmony type.  
3
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 137 for  
information about the available harmony types.  
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony  
function. The effect and operation of each Har-  
mony Type is different-refer to the below section  
the Effect Type List for details.  
NOTE  
• When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature  
on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main  
voice is automatically selected.  
Press and hold the [HARMONY] button  
for longer than a second.  
2
The currently selected harmony type will be  
displayed.  
NOTE  
• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual  
or Split Voices.  
• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony  
notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).  
• Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo)  
• Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill)  
How to sound each Harmony Type  
• Harmony type 01 to 10, 13  
Keep holding  
down the keys.  
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the  
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the  
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 28).  
Hold down two  
keys.  
• Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo)  
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function  
Keep holding  
down the keys.  
70 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Play with a Variety of Effects  
Adding Reverb  
Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience.  
When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you  
want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on  
page 138 for information about the available reverb types.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up  
the FUNCTION display.  
Use the dial to select a reverb type.  
1
3
You can check how the selected reverb type  
sounds by playing on the keyboard.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Reverb Type item.  
2
Selected reverb type.  
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for  
information about the available reverb types.  
Adjusting the Reverb Level  
You can individually adjust the amount of reverb  
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.  
(See page 93).  
Reverb Type item  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Play with a Variety of Effects  
Adding Chorus  
The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.  
When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If  
you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up  
the FUNCTION display.  
Use the dial to select a chorus type.  
1
3
You can check how the selected chorus type  
sounds by playing on the keyboard.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Chorus Type item.  
2
Selected chorus type.  
Chorus Type item  
Adjusting the Chorus Level  
You can individually adjust the amount of chorus  
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.  
(See page 93).  
72 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Play with a Variety of Effects  
Adding DSP  
DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and  
Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing  
tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it.  
Use the [DSP ON/OFF] button to turn  
the DSP function on.  
Use the dial to select a DSP type.  
1
3
Refer to the DSP Type List on page 139 for  
information about the available DSP types.  
The indicator lights when DSP is on.  
To turn DSP off, press the [DSP ON/OFF] but-  
ton again.  
NOTE  
• When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice  
is automatically selected.  
• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning  
DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change dif-  
fers depending on the selected Voice.  
• The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected.  
For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for  
example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected.  
This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which  
replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phe-  
nomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B  
Repeat function during song playback.  
Currently selected DSP type.  
Adjusting the DSP Level  
You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that  
is applied to the main and dual voices.  
(See page 93).  
Press and hold the [DSP ON/OFF] but-  
ton for longer than a second.  
2
The currently selected DSP type will be dis-  
played.  
Hold for longer  
than a second  
DSP Type  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Play with a Variety of Effects  
Panel Sustain  
This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all  
times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up  
the FUNCTION display.  
You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons  
to turn panel sustain on or off.  
1
3
NOTE  
• The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the  
panel sustain function is turned on.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Sustain item.  
2
The current setting is displayed.  
Pitch Bend  
The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll  
the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch.  
If you use this feature with a voice such as the “048 Overdriven” guitar voice (page 19), you can produce  
remarkably realistic string-bending effects.  
You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 93.  
74 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Handy Performance Features  
Tap Start  
You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times  
for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song  
playback by pressing the button just twice.  
Touch Response Sensitivity  
You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity  
setting between 1 and 3. Higher values  
produce greater (easier) volume varia-  
tion in response to keyboard dynamics  
—i.e. greater sensitivity.  
1
3
The currently selected function will appear in  
the display.  
A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch  
response, or no level change no matter how  
hard or how soft you play the keys.  
NOTE  
• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Touch Sensitivity  
item.  
2
The currently selected touch sensitivity will be  
displayed.  
Touch Sensitivity item  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Handy Performance Features  
One Touch Setting  
Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting  
feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select  
voice number “000” to activate this feature.  
Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2  
on page 19).  
Use the dial to change songs, then play  
the keyboard and listen to the voice.  
1
4
You should hear a different keyboard voice  
than you played in step 3. Watch the display  
while changing songs and you will see that dif-  
ferent voices are selected for each song.  
Use the dial to select  
voice number 000.  
Select and play back any song (steps 1  
to 3 on page 33).  
2
3
Play the keyboard and remember the  
sound of the voice.  
If you have stopped playback at some point  
during this procedure press the [START/STOP]  
button to start playback again.  
76 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handy Performance Features  
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound  
Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-  
ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external  
speaker system.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
The currently selected function will appear in  
the display.  
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
2
tons as many times as necessary to  
select the master EQ type function  
“Master EQ Type”.  
The currently selected EQ type will appear.  
The currently selected  
master EQ type.  
Use the dial to select the desired Master  
EQ setting.  
3
Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and  
2 are best for listening via the instrument’s  
built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,  
and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via  
external speakers.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handy Performance Features  
Pitch Controls  
Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)  
The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted  
up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone  
increments.  
Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)  
The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted  
up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent  
increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
1
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Transpose item.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Tuning item.  
2
2
Transpose item  
Tuning item  
Can be set between -12 and +12  
Can be set between -100 and +100  
Use the dial to set the transpose value  
between -12 and +12 as required.  
Use the dial to set the tuning value  
between -100 and +100 as required.  
3
3
NOTE  
NOTE  
• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.  
• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.  
78 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 27 of  
the Quick Guide.  
Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-  
dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.  
Pattern Variation (Sections)  
The DGX-630/YPG-635 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement  
of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing.  
Intro  
Main A/B  
Ending  
Auto fill  
INTRO section  
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the  
main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.  
MAIN section  
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats  
indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A  
and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left  
hand.  
Fill-in section  
This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.  
ENDING section  
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops  
automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Press the [STYLE] button and then  
select a style.  
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.  
1
4
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to  
turn auto accompaniment on.  
2
The name of the selected sec-  
tion—MAIN A or MAIN B—will  
be displayed.  
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
5
6
Appears when auto  
accompaniment is on.  
You’re now ready to play the intro.  
As soon as you play a chord with your  
left hand, the Intro of the selected Style  
starts.  
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn  
synchro start on.  
3
For this example, play a C major chord (as  
shown below). For information on how to enter  
Chords” on page 32.  
The indicator will flash when the  
synchro start standby mode will  
be engaged.  
Split point  
Accompaniment range  
Synchro Start  
When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,  
style playback will begin as soon as you play a  
chord in the accompaniment range of the  
keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start  
standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START]  
button again.  
80 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.  
7
8
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly  
into the selected main section A/B.  
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.  
The style will play  
while you are playing  
the keys  
Style playback will  
stop when you  
release the keys  
This switches to the ending section.  
When the ending is finished, the auto accompa-  
niment stops automatically. You can have the  
ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by  
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button  
again while the ending is playing back.  
Synchro Stop  
When this function is selected the accompaniment  
style will only play while you are playing chords  
in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.  
Style playback will stop when you release the  
keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC  
STOP] button.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Setting the Split Point  
The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the  
procedure described below.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
Use the dial to set the split point to any  
key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7).  
1
3
Split point (54: F#2)  
Main voice  
Split voice  
NOTE  
• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point  
also changes.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Split point item.  
• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.  
• The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.  
2
NOTE  
You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]  
button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the  
82 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)  
When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play  
chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the  
accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the  
instrument can be used (page 32).  
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn  
auto accompaniment on after pressing the  
[STYLE] button.  
Accompaniment range  
Appears when auto  
accompaniment is  
on  
Adjusting the Style Volume  
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the  
style function.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Style Volume item.  
2
3
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
Use the dial to set the style volume  
between 000 and 127.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Chord Basics  
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.  
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the  
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,  
for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the  
C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).  
3rd  
3rd  
Root  
In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the  
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for  
the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and  
anchors the other chord notes.  
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.  
Major third–four half steps (semitones)  
Minor third–three half steps (semitones)  
The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad  
is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-  
tional chords, as shown below.  
Major chord  
CM  
Minor chord  
Cm  
Augmented chord  
Diminished chord  
Caug  
Cdim  
Minor 3rd  
Minor 3rd  
Major 3rd  
Major 3rd  
Minor 3rd  
Major 3rd  
Major 3rd  
Minor 3rd  
The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create  
different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by  
choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).  
Reading Chord Names  
Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord  
(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the  
Cm  
chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a  
Root note  
Chord type  
major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.  
Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the DGX-630/YPG-635.)  
Suspended 4 th  
7 th  
Minor 7 th  
Major 7 th  
CM7  
Csus4  
C7  
Cm7  
Perfect 5 th  
Perfect 4 th  
Flatted 7 th  
Major chord  
Flatted 7 th  
Minor chord  
Major 7 th  
Major chord  
Minor/major 7 th  
7 th, flatted 5 th  
Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th  
7 th, suspended 4 th  
(
)
(
)
b5  
b5  
CmM7  
C7sus4  
C7  
Cm7  
Major 7 th  
Minor chord  
Flatted 5 th  
7 th chord  
Flatted 5 th  
Minor 7 th chord  
Flatted 7 th  
Suspended  
4 th chord  
84 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.  
Chord Name/[Abbreviation]  
Major [M]  
Normal Voicing  
1 - 3 - 5  
Chord (C)  
Display  
C
C
)
C(9  
Add ninth [(9)]  
1 - 2 - 3 - 5  
C9  
C6  
C6  
Sixth [6]  
1 - (3) - 5 - 6  
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6  
1 - 3 - (5) - 7  
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7  
C6  
(
)
9
9
Sixth ninth [6(9)]  
Major seventh [M7]  
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)]  
*
C6  
CM7  
CM7  
CM7  
(
)
9
9
*
CM7  
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or  
(
)
#11  
#11  
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]  
CM7  
*
CM7  
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7  
C(b5  
(
CM7  
)
b5  
Flatted fifth [(b5)]  
1 - 3 - b5  
1 - 3 - b5 - 7  
1 - 4 - 5  
C
*
)
b5  
b5  
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5]  
Suspended fourth [sus4]  
Augmented [aug]  
CM7  
*
Csus4  
Caug  
Csus4  
Caug  
CM7aug  
Cm  
1 - 3 - #5  
1 - (3) - #5 - 7  
1 - b3 - 5  
Major seventh augmented [M7aug]  
Minor [m]  
CM7aug *  
Cm  
(
)
9
Minor add ninth [m(9)]  
1 - 2 - b3 - 5  
1 - b3 - 5 - 6  
1 - b3 - (5) - b7  
1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7  
1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)  
1 - b3 - (5) - 7  
1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7  
1 - b3 - b5 - b7  
1 - b3 - b5 - 7  
1 - b3 - b5  
Cm9  
Cm  
Minor sixth [m6]  
Cm6  
Cm6  
Minor seventh [m7]  
Cm7  
(
Cm7  
)
9
9
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)]  
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)]  
Minor major seventh [mM7]  
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)]  
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5]  
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5]  
Diminished [dim]  
Cm7  
Cm7  
(
)
11  
11  
Cm7  
*
Cm7  
CmM7  
CmM7  
CmM7  
(
)
9
9
*
CmM7  
(
Cm7  
)
b5  
b5  
Cm7  
(
)
b5  
b5  
CmM7  
Cdim  
Cdim7  
*
CmM7  
Cdim  
Diminished seventh [dim7]  
1 - b3 - b5 - 6  
Cdim7  
C7  
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or  
Seventh [7]  
C7  
1 - (3) - 5 - b7  
(
)
b9  
b9  
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)]  
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)]  
Seventh ninth [7(9)]  
1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7  
1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7  
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7  
C7  
C7  
(
)
b13  
b13  
C7  
C7  
(
)
9
9
C7  
C7  
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or  
(
)
#11  
#11  
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]  
C7  
C7  
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7  
(
)
13  
13  
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)]  
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)]  
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5]  
Seventh augmented [7aug]  
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]  
Suspended second [sus2]  
1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7  
1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7  
1 - 3 - b5 - b7  
1 - 3 - #5 - b7  
1 - 4 - 5 - b7  
C7  
C7  
(
)
#9  
#9  
C7  
C7  
b5  
C7b5  
C7  
*
C7aug  
C7sus4  
Csus2  
C7aug  
C7sus4  
Csus2 *  
1 - 2 - 5  
* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.  
• Inversion of the m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in  
parentheses are omitted.  
• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-  
niment based only on the root.  
• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related  
chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the  
minor seventh).  
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root  
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.  
Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played  
chord.  
• The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions  
can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4,  
aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard  
detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however,  
chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even  
more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 32) can be  
detected.  
Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-  
ton for longer than a second to select  
the function “Chord Fingering”.  
Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.  
1
2
Hold for longer than a second  
86 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions  
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary  
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.  
It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.  
Press and hold the LESSON [START]  
button for longer than a second.  
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in  
the section of the keyboard labeled  
“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t  
sound.) The notes you should play for  
the specified chord (root note and  
chord type) are shown in the display,  
both as notation and in the keyboard  
diagram.  
1
3
Hold for longer than a second  
Notation of chord  
Chord name (root and type)  
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a  
GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the  
“G” key in the section of the keyboard  
labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t  
sound.) The root note you set is shown  
in the display.  
2
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)  
To call up possible inversions of the chord,  
press the [+]/[-] buttons.  
NOTE  
• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only  
by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when  
specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after  
pressing the root note.  
• Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand  
notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the per-  
formance assistant technology feature.  
Try playing a chord in the auto accom-  
paniment section of the keyboard,  
checking the indications in the display.  
When you’ve played the chord properly,  
a bell sound signals your success and  
the chord name in the display flash.  
4
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Song Settings  
Song Volume  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
2
Song volume item  
Can be set between 000 and 127  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Song Volume item.  
Use the dial to set the song volume  
between 000 and 127.  
3
2
NOTE  
• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.  
A-B Repeat  
You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the  
start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat  
playback.  
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-  
ond time at the end of the section you  
want to repeat (the “B” point).  
A
B
Play the song (page 33) and press the  
[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning  
of the section you want to repeat (the  
“A” point).  
1
The specified A-B section of the song  
will now play repeatedly.  
3
You can stop repeat playback at any time by  
pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.  
NOTE  
• Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within the same  
measure While the song is stopped.  
• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-  
back.  
• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song  
press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.  
88 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Song Settings  
Muting Independent Song Parts  
Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the  
song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.  
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted  
part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute  
tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To  
mute a track, press the appropriate track button  
(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same but-  
ton a second time to disengage track muting.  
No track number ... no data.  
Track number without border  
... track contains data but is muted.  
Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted.  
Change the Melody Voice  
You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.  
Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simul-  
taneously so that “LR” appears in the  
upper right corner of the MAIN display.  
Select the song and play it.  
Use the dial to select the voice.  
2
As you select different melody voices, only the  
melody voice changes while the song will  
remain the same.  
Press the [VOICE] button for longer  
than a second.  
1
The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MEL-  
ODY L) display will appear so you can select  
the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the  
[VOICE] button alternates between VOICE  
SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L.  
Hold for longer  
than a second  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings  
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-  
tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved  
(8 banks of two setups each).  
8 Banks  
Up to 16 presets (eight  
banks of two each) can  
be memorized.  
Memory 1  
Memory 2  
Saving to the Registration Memory  
Set the panel controls as required—  
select a voice, accompaniment style,  
etc.  
Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]  
button while holding the [MEMORY/  
BANK] button to store the current panel  
settings to the specified registration  
memory.  
1
2
4
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A  
bank number will appear in the display  
when you release the button.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display in order to check the bank and registra-  
tion memory numbers.  
Bank number  
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-  
tons to select a bank number from 1 to  
8.  
3
Bank number  
NOTE  
You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration  
memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a com-  
puter as the backup file.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains  
data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.  
• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-  
back.  
CAUTION  
• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-  
tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.  
90 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings  
Recalling a Registration Memory  
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A  
bank number will appear in the display  
when you release the button.  
1
Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-  
tion Memory  
Style settings*  
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,  
Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),  
Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering  
Voice settings  
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,  
Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP  
Level),  
Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice  
number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,  
Chorus Level, DSP Level),  
Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,  
Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,  
Reverb Level, Chorus Level)  
Bank number  
Effect settings  
Reverb Type, Chorus Type,  
Panel Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type  
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-  
tons to select bank you want to recall.  
2
3
Harmony settings  
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,  
Harmony Volume  
Other settings  
Transpose, Pitch Bend Range  
* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when  
using the Song features.  
You can check whether the panel settings are  
stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by press-  
ing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]  
or [2], containing the settings you want  
to recall.The panel controls will be  
instantly set accordingly.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
The Functions  
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-  
ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects.Take a look at the func-  
tion list starting on the opposite page.There are 50 function parameters in all.  
When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display  
name and adjust as required.  
Selecting and Setting Functions  
Find the function you want to set in the  
list that begins on page 93.  
Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or  
the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the  
selected function as required.  
1
2
4
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/  
OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.  
In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-  
tion of the selected function, and the [-] will  
cancel the selection.  
Direct numeric  
entry.  
Select a function.  
3
• Decrement value by 1.  
• OFF  
• Increment value by 1.  
• ON  
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as  
many times as necessary until the function’s  
display name appears in the display.  
• Cancel  
• Execute  
Press simultaneously to  
recall the default setting.  
Function category  
Previous item  
Next item  
Some Function settings are stored in memory  
as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup  
function settings that are stored on the instru-  
ment.  
To restore all initial factor default settings per-  
form the “Backup Clear” procedure described  
in the “Initialization” section on page 65.  
The selected function  
Value  
92 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The Functions  
Function Setting List  
Category  
Function Item  
Style Volume  
Song Volume  
Transpose  
Range/Settings  
000–127  
Description  
Determines the volume of the Style.  
Determines the volume of the Song.  
VOLUME  
000–127  
-12–+12  
Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.  
Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.  
Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.  
Tuning  
-100–+100  
01–12  
Pitch Bend Range  
Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in  
other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)  
voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are  
automatically set to the same value.  
Split Point  
021(A-1)–108(C7)  
OVERALL  
1(Soft), 2(Medium),  
3(Hard), 4 (Off)  
Touch Sensitivity  
Chord Fingering  
Determines the sensitivity of the feature.  
Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal  
chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In  
the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard  
will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well.  
1(Multi Finger),  
2(FullKeyboard)  
Main Volume  
Main Octave  
000–127  
-2–+2  
Determines the volume of the Main voice.  
Determines the octave range for the Main voice.  
000 (left)–  
64 (center)–  
127 (right)  
Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The  
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results  
in the sound being panned full right.  
Main Pan  
MAIN VOICE  
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb  
effect.  
Main Reverb Level  
000–127  
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus  
effect.  
Main Chorus Level 000–127  
Main DSP Level  
Dual Volume  
Dual Octave  
000–127  
000–127  
-2–+2  
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.  
Determines the volume of the Dual voice.  
Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.  
000 (left)–  
64 (center)–  
127 (right)  
Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The  
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results  
in the sound being panned full right.  
Dual Pan  
DUAL VOICE  
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb  
effect.  
Dual Reverb Level  
Dual Chorus Level  
000–127  
000–127  
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus  
effect.  
Dual DSP Level  
Split Volume  
Split Octave  
000–127  
000–127  
-2–+2  
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.  
Determines the volume of the Split voice.  
Determines the octave range for the Split voice.  
000 (left)–  
64 (center)–  
127 (right)  
Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The  
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results  
in the sound being panned full right.  
Split Pan  
SPLIT VOICE  
Split Reverb Level  
Split Chorus Level  
000–127  
000–127  
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.  
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus  
effect.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
The Functions  
Category  
Function Item  
Reverb Type  
Chorus Type  
DSP Type  
Range/Settings  
01–30  
Description  
Determines the Reverb type, including off. (See the list on page 138)  
Determines the Chorus type, including off. (See the list on page 138)  
Determines the DSP type, including off. (See the list on page 139)  
1–25  
001–183  
Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/  
DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not  
applied when OFF. (page 74)  
EFFECT  
Sustain  
ON/OFF  
1(Speaker 1),  
2(Speaker 2),  
3(Headphones),  
4(Line Out 1),  
5(Line Out 2)  
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in  
different listening situations.  
Master EQ Type  
Harmony Type  
01–26  
Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 137)  
Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.  
HARMONY  
Harmony Volume  
000–127  
CHORD,  
CHORD/FREE,  
MELODY,  
Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list  
PAT  
PC  
P.A.T. Type  
CHORD/MELODY  
PC Mode  
Local  
PC1/PC2/OFF  
ON/OFF  
Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 106).  
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone  
generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 106)  
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock  
(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 106)  
External Clock  
Keyboard Out  
Style Out  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
YES/NO  
01–60  
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is  
transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).  
MIDI  
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)  
during Style playback.  
Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)  
during Song playback.  
Song Out  
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to  
send, or press [-] to cancel.  
Initial Setup  
Time Signature -  
Numerator  
Determines the time signature of the Metronome.  
Sets the length of each metronome beat.  
Time Signature -  
Denominator  
2, 4, 8, 16  
ON/OFF  
METRONOME  
Bell  
Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF).  
Determines the volume of the Metronome.  
Metronome Volume 000–127  
1(1/4 note),  
2(1/4 note triplet),  
3(1/8 note),  
Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by  
adjusting the timing of the notes.  
4(1/8 note triplet),  
5(1/16 note),  
6(1/16 note triplet),  
7(1/32 note),  
This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For  
example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you  
should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this  
value will not be shown in the score.  
SCORE  
Quantize  
8(1/32 note triplet)  
94 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
The Functions  
Category  
Function Item  
Range/Settings  
Description  
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting  
is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.  
Right-Part  
GuideTrack 1–16  
LESSON  
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is  
effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.  
Left-Part  
Grade  
GuideTrack 1–16  
ON/OFF  
Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.  
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not.When this is set to ON,  
the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.  
UTILITY  
Demo Cancel  
ON/OFF  
Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names,  
lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are  
displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are  
displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language  
setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting  
exists, the setting here is used.  
LANGUAGE  
Language  
English/Japanese  
* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.  
(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Saving and Loading Data  
USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.  
When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,  
registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. USB flash mem-  
ory can also be used to transfer Song, Style, and Music Database files to the instru-  
ment, where they can be selected and used in the same way as the internal data.  
In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash  
memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.  
Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO  
Connecting a USB Flash Memory  
Connect a USB flash memory to the  
USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful  
to insert it with the proper orientation.  
Check that the file control icon is shown  
in the MAIN display.  
1
2
Appears while the  
memory device is  
being mounted.  
File Control Icon  
You can go to the FILE CONTROL display  
from which you can access file operations by  
pressing the [MENU] button from this display.  
(Do not press this button now, but only when  
instructed to in the sections below.)  
A message (information or confirmation dialog)  
sometimes appears on the display to facilitate  
for an explanation of each message.  
Menu  
Format  
Reference Page  
User File Save  
User Song Save  
Load  
USB Delete  
User Delete  
NOTE  
• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE  
CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related  
to file functions will be active.  
NOTE  
• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following  
cases:  
• During style or song playback.  
• During a lesson.  
• While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory.  
96 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Saving and Loading Data  
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal  
This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to  
handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.  
NOTE  
• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.  
Compatible USB devices  
Using USB Storage Devices  
• USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive)  
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you  
can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as  
well as read data from the connected device.  
The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-  
cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee  
operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-  
chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please  
visit the following web page:  
NOTE  
• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-  
ment, they cannot be used for saving data.  
http://music.yamaha.com/download/  
The number of USB storage device to be used  
Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the  
USB TO DEVICE terminal.  
NOTE  
• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot  
be used.  
Formatting USB storage media  
When a USB storage device is connected or media is  
inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format  
the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page  
Connecting USB device  
• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE  
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is  
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,  
you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with  
the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is  
that of USB 1.1.  
• The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.  
Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain  
important data.  
To protect your data (write-protect)  
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,  
apply the write-protect provided with each storage device  
or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,  
make sure to disable write-protect.  
Connecting/removing USB storage device  
Before removing the media from the device, make sure that  
the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save  
and Delete operations).  
CAUTION  
• Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage  
device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.  
Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freez-  
ing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data  
(such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or  
is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-  
tion), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the  
media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either  
device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both  
devices.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving and Loading Data  
Formatting USB Flash Memory  
New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the format operation  
will begin.  
5
CAUTION  
• If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of  
the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data  
when using the format function.  
CAUTION  
• Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display  
the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the  
power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation.  
After connecting the USB flash memory  
1
to be formatted to the instrument’s USB  
TO DEVICE terminal, check that the  
icon is showing in the MAIN display.  
A message will appear on the display to  
inform you that the operation has fin-  
ished.  
6
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
NOTE  
• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate  
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-  
cute the operation.  
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-  
ton.  
2
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to select the Format item.  
The display prompts you for confirmation.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button and the  
display prompts you for confirmation.  
4
You can press the [-] button at this point to can-  
cel the operation.  
98 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Saving and Loading Data  
Saving User Files (Registration Memory) to USB Flash Memory  
This operation saves a “User File” containing the registration memory data to a USB flash memory device.  
The User File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display.  
Make sure that a properly formatted  
1
USB flash memory has been properly  
connected to the instrument’s USB TO  
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is  
showing in the MAIN display.  
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.  
2
Cursor left  
Delete character  
Cursor right  
The dial selects  
characters  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to locate the Regist Save item.  
3
A default file name will automatically be cre-  
ated.  
Cursor  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.The dis-  
play prompts you for confirmation.  
You can cancel the save operation at this point  
by pressing the [-] button.  
6
7
To Overwrite an Existing File  
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists  
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the  
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip  
ahead to step 6.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the save operation  
will begin.  
The user song will be stored to the USER FILE  
folder in the USB flash memory.  
NOTE  
• Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory.  
• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate  
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-  
cute the operation.  
CAUTION  
• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the  
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or  
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.  
• If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save  
the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you  
will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB  
flash memory to make more memory available (page 102), or use a  
different USB flash memory.  
A message will appear on the display to  
inform you that the operation has fin-  
ished.  
8
• Refer to the “Messages” list on page 120 for other possible errors  
that might prevent you from completing the operation.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor  
will appear below the first character in  
the file name.  
4
5
NOTE  
• If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-  
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]  
to cancel.  
Change the file name as necessary.  
• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will  
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.  
• The [-] button moves the cursor to the left,  
and the [0] button moves it to the right.  
• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-  
rent cursor location.  
• The [+] button deletes the character at the  
cursor location.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Saving and Loading Data  
Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory  
This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–035) to USB flash memory.  
Make sure that a properly formatted  
USB flash memory has been properly  
connected to the instrument’s USB TO  
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is  
showing in the MAIN display.  
Change the file name as necessary.  
1
7
for filename entry.  
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-  
ton.  
2
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to locate the User Song Save item.  
The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will  
be highlighted.  
The name of the file to  
be saved  
Cursor  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.The dis-  
play prompts you for confirmation.  
You can cancel the save operation at this point  
by pressing the [-] button.  
8
9
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the save operation  
will begin.  
The user song will be stored to the USER FILE  
folder in the USB flash memory.  
The source user song name.  
CAUTION  
• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the  
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or  
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.  
Select the source user song.  
You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-  
neously to select the first user song.  
4
5
A message will appear on the display  
to inform you that the operation has  
finished.  
10  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.  
The DESTINATION SONG will be high-  
lighted, and a default name will automatically  
be created.  
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
NOTE  
To Overwrite an Existing File  
• If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-  
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]  
to cancel.  
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists  
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the  
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip  
ahead to step 7.  
• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will  
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.  
A cursor will appear below the first character in  
the file name.  
6
100 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving and Loading Data  
Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory  
User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded  
into the instrument.  
Use the dial to select the file you want  
to load.  
by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash  
All user files in the USB flash memory will be  
memory before loading data that will overwrite it.  
4
CAUTION  
• If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten  
displayed first, followed by the style files, song  
files and music database files.  
Files must be located in the “User Files” folder  
in the USB flash memory. Files located outside  
of that folder will not be recognized.  
With the USB flash memory containing  
the file you want to load connected to  
the USB TO DEVICE connector, check  
1
that the File Control icon is shown in  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.The dis-  
5
the MAIN display.  
play prompts you for confirmation.  
You can cancel the load operation at this point  
by pressing the [-] button.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the load operation  
6
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-  
ton.  
2
will begin.  
CAUTION  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
3
• Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the  
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or  
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.  
tons to locate the Load item.  
A message will appear on the display to  
inform you that the operation has fin-  
ished.  
7
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Saving and Loading Data  
Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory  
This procedure deletes User, Style, Song, and Music Database files from a USB flash memory.  
Make sure that the USB flash memory  
containing the file(s) you want to delete  
has been properly connected to the  
instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,  
and that the icon is showing in the  
MAIN display.  
Use the dial to select the file you want  
to delete.  
1
4
All User files in the USB flash memory will be  
displayed first, followed by the style files, song  
files and music database files.  
Files must be located in the “User Files” folder  
in the USB flash memory. Files located outside  
of that folder will not be recognized.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.The dis-  
play prompts you for confirmation.  
5
6
You can cancel the delete operation at this  
point by pressing the [-] button.  
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-  
ton.  
2
3
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the delete operation  
will begin.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to locate the USB Delete item.  
CAUTION  
• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display  
the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or  
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.  
A message will appear on the display to  
inform you that the operation has fin-  
ished.  
7
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
NOTE  
• If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate  
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-  
cute the operation.  
102 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Saving and Loading Data  
Delete User Data from the Instrument  
This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database les transferred from an  
external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data.  
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.  
All user songs will be displayed first, followed  
by the song, style and music database files.  
1
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-  
tons to locate the User Delete item.  
Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB  
flash memory is connected to the instrument.  
Press the [EXECUTE] button.The dis-  
play prompts you for confirmation.  
You can cancel the delete operation at this  
point by pressing the [-] button.  
4
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or  
the [+] button, and the delete operation  
will begin.  
CAUTION  
• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display  
the operation cannot be canceled.  
A message will appear on the display to  
inform you that the operation has fin-  
ished.  
6
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN  
display.  
Use the dial to select the file you want  
to delete.  
3
Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory  
Make sure that the USB flash memory  
containing the file you want to play has  
been properly connected to the instru-  
ment’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and  
that the icon is showing in the MAIN  
display.  
IMPORTANT  
1
• In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a com-  
puter or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB  
flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in  
the root directory.  
Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level  
folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument.  
USB flash memory (Root)  
Song  
File  
Song  
Can be selected/played.  
File  
Press the [SONG], [STYLE] or [MUSIC  
DATABASE] button. Files of the corre-  
sponding type will be displayed.  
2
Song  
File  
Use the dial to select the file you want  
to play.  
3
4
Song  
Cannot be selected/played.  
File  
Play the selected file in the same way  
the internal files are played: press the  
[START/STOP] button, or play on the  
keyboard.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Connections  
Connectors  
q
w
q USB TO DEVICE terminal  
w USB TO HOST terminal  
This terminal allows connection to USB stor-  
age devices. Refer to “Precautions when using  
This terminal allows direct connection to a per-  
sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-  
information.  
104 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connections  
Connecting a Personal Computer  
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.  
Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 106).  
Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 108).  
The connection procedure is as follows:  
Precautions when using the USB TO  
HOST terminal  
Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-  
When connecting the computer to the USB TO  
HOST terminal, make sure to observe the follow-  
ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-  
puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the  
computer or the instrument freezes, restart the  
application software or the computer OS, or turn  
the power to the instrument off then on again.  
1
puter.  
The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.  
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on  
Connect the USB terminal of the computer to  
2
the USB terminal on the instrument using an  
AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sepa-  
rately).  
CAUTION  
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.  
• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal,  
exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-  
pended, sleep, standby).  
The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft  
Downloader application that allows you to transfer  
song files from your computer to the instrument’s  
flash memory. For instructions about how to install  
Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song  
files, see pages 108, 115.  
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-  
puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.  
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument  
on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO  
HOST] terminal.  
• Quit any open application software on the computer.  
• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-  
ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard  
or play back a song, etc.)  
Computer  
• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should  
wait for six seconds or more between these operations:  
(1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or  
(2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.  
Instrument  
USB cable  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer  
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-  
puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.  
When the instrument is connected with computer,  
it transmits/receives performance data.  
USB terminal  
USB terminal  
Computer  
Instrument  
USB cable  
MIDI settings  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.  
Item  
Range/Settings  
Description  
Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal  
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when  
local control is off.  
Local  
ON/OFF  
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to  
a clock signal from an external device (ON).  
External Clock  
Keyboard Out  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or  
not (OFF).  
Style Out  
Song Out  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.  
These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
1
CAUTION  
• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely  
may be caused by Local Control being set to off.  
CAUTION  
• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from  
an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will  
not start.  
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons  
to select the item you want to change its  
value.  
2
3
Use the dial to select ON or OFF.  
106 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Connections  
Press and hold the [DEMO] button for  
longer than a second so that the PC  
Mode item appears.  
PC Mode  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
1
A number of MIDI settings need to be made when  
you want to transfer performance data between the  
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item  
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in  
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,  
PC2, and OFF.  
This setting is not necessary when transferring  
song or backup files between the computer and the  
instrument.  
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-  
book.  
PC1  
OFF  
ON  
PC2*  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Local  
External Clock  
Song Out  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.  
2
Style Out  
NOTE  
Keyboard Out  
• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,  
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.  
NOTE  
You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNC-  
TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to  
Remote Control of MIDI Devices  
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on  
your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the  
panel.  
Remote control keys  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
NOTE  
• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2  
mode.  
To use the remote control functions, simulta-  
neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-  
board (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate  
key (shown below).  
A#-1  
A-1  
C7: Fast forward  
B6: Start  
A6: Stop  
G6: Rewind  
F6: Top (move to the begin-  
ning of the song)  
E6: Metronome ON/OFF  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Initial Send  
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a  
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup  
data before the actual performance data.  
Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]  
to cancel.  
1
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons  
to select the Initial Send item.  
2
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument  
Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a  
computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-  
ferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be  
transferred from the instrument to the computer  
and back.  
In order to transfer files between your computer  
and the instrument you will need to install the  
Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-  
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM  
on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-  
ROM Installation Guide on page 111 for installa-  
tion details.  
What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?  
The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one  
of the most common and widely compatible  
sequence formats used for storing sequence  
data. There are two variations: Format 0 and  
Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are  
compatible with SMF Format 0, and most  
commercially available MIDI sequence data is  
provided in SMF Format 0.  
With the Musicsoft  
DownloaderYou Can.  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
Transfer files from the computer to the instru-  
Data that can be transferred from a computer  
ment’s flash memory.  
to this instrument.  
• Data Capacity: 1895KB  
502 files total for the Song, Style and Music  
Database.  
refer to the procedure described on  
page 109.  
The procedure for transferring songs included  
on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-  
puter to the instrument is given as an example.  
• Data Format  
Song: .mid SMF format 0/1  
Style: .sty  
Music Database: .mfd  
Backup File: 08PG88G.bup  
Backup file can be transferred from the instru-  
ment to a computer and back.  
refer to the procedure described on  
page 110.  
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with  
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.  
108 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Connections  
At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-  
base file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer  
it to the instrument in the same way as a song file.  
Use Musicsoft Downloader  
To Transfer Songs From the  
Accessory CD-ROM To the  
Instrument’s flash memory  
● ● ● ● ●  
A copy of the selected MIDI song file  
will appear in the “List of files stored  
temporarily” at the top of the window.  
6
NOTE  
• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.  
The memory medium will also be displayed at  
the bottom of the window to specify the desti-  
nation for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and  
then “Flash memory”.  
Install the Musicsoft Downloader and  
1
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then  
connect the computer and the instru-  
ment (page 113).  
Insert the included CD-ROM into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
A start window will appear automatically.  
Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader  
shortcut icon that is created on the  
desktop.  
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader  
application and the main window will appear.  
NOTE  
• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader  
is running.  
Click the “Add File” button and the Add  
File window will appear.  
4
5
Click the button to the right of “Look in”  
and select the CD-ROM drive from the  
drop-down menu that appears. Double-  
click the “SampleData” Folder on the  
window. Select the file from the “Song-  
Data” Folder you want to transfer to the  
instrument, and click “Open”.  
q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,  
and then “Flash Memory”  
After selecting the file in the “List of  
7
files stored temporarily”, click the  
downward [Move] button and a confir-  
mation message will appear. Click [OK]  
and the song will be transferred from  
the “List of files stored temporarily” to  
the instrument’s memory.  
q Click the CD-ROM drive  
NOTE  
• Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory using the  
Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder  
on the USB flash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instru-  
ment’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete but-  
ton to delete such files.  
w Double-click “SampleData” Folder “Song-  
Data” Folder, and click a song file.  
e Click “Open”  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Close the window to end the Musicsoft  
Downloader.  
Transfer a Backup file from  
8
9
the instrument to a computer  
● ● ●  
NOTE  
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer  
“Backup” files containing Registration Memory and  
click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the  
Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System  
Drive”, a file named “08PG88G.bup” will appear in  
the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader  
display. This is the backup file. For details about  
how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft  
Downloader application, refer to the Online help  
“Transferring Data Between the Computer and  
Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the applica-  
tion.  
• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from  
your computer.  
To playback a song stored in flash  
memory, press the [SONG] button.  
Use the dial to select the song you want  
to play, then press the [START/STOP]  
button to start playback.  
CAUTION  
• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only  
will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the  
memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-  
appear completely when the power is turned on or off.  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.  
• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or  
improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a  
copy of all important data stored on your computer.  
CAUTION  
• The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result,  
all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you  
transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data.  
To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...  
In order to use songs (only SMF format 0 and 1)  
transferred from a computer for lessons it is  
necessary to specify which channels are to be  
played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.  
CAUTION  
• Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will  
not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.  
1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song  
(036–) residing in flash memory for which you  
want to set the guide track.  
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.  
3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to  
select the R-Part or L-Part item.  
4
Use the dial to select the channel you want to  
play back as the specified right- or left-hand part.  
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the  
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.  
110 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
e
r
n
e
f
c
e
e
R
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.  
• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon  
breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of  
this manual before installing the application.)  
• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden  
without the written consent of the manufacturer.  
Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-  
not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.  
• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).  
Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.  
• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be  
announced separately.  
• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different  
from the screens which appear on your computer.  
Important Notices about the CD-ROM  
Data Types  
This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 113 for software installation instructions.  
CAUTION  
• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other  
than a computer.The resulting high-volume noise may cause hear-  
ing damage or damage to the playback device.  
Operating System (OS)  
The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
CD-ROM Contents  
e
q
r
w
Folder Name  
MSD_  
Application / Data Name  
Contents  
This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet  
and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.  
Musicsoft Downloader  
q
w
Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and  
online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your  
favorite songs.  
You can experience Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song  
after installing Digital Music Notebook.  
DMN_  
Digital Music Notebook  
Digital Music Notebook  
Flash Demo  
Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital  
Music Notebook.  
DMN_FlashDemo  
SongBook  
Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as  
well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM.The exceptions are songs  
1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11  
are provided in this manual beginning on page 122.  
Song Book  
e
r
USB-MIDI Driver  
(Windows 2000/XP)  
USBdrv2k_  
This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer  
via USB.  
USB-MIDI Driver  
(Windows Vista/XP x64)  
USBdrvVista_  
SongData  
MIDI 70 songs  
These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the  
instrument and played or used with the instrument functions.  
SampleData  
StyleData  
MDB  
5 style files  
5 music database files  
In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.  
You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/  
Connect the instrument to the com-  
puter.  
Using the CD-ROM  
Please read the Software License Agreement on  
page 147 before opening the CD-ROM package.  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
4
The connection procedure is described on page  
Check the system requirements to  
make sure that the software will run on  
your computer.  
1
Install the software.  
5
6
Musicsoft Downloader:  
See page 115.  
Insert the included CD-ROM into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Launch the software.  
2
For further software operation refer to the online  
help supplied with the software.  
The start window should appear automatically.  
Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com-  
puter.  
3
Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 116 when  
you have trouble with installing the driver.  
112 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
System Requirements  
Application/Data  
OS  
CPU  
Memory  
Hard Disk  
Display  
233 MHz or higher; Intel®  
Pentium®/Celeron®  
Processor family  
(500 MHz or higher is  
recommended)  
at least 128 MB of  
free space (at least 800 x 600  
(256 MB or more 512 MB of free  
is recommended) space is  
recommended)  
Windows 2000/XP Home  
Edition/XP Professional/  
Vista  
64 MB or more  
Musicsoft Downloader  
HighColor  
(16-bit)  
* Only 32-bit is supported.  
166 MHz or higher; Intel® 32 MB or more  
USB Driver for Windows Windows 2000/XP Home  
2000/XP Edition/XP Professional  
at least 3 MB of free  
space  
Pentium®/Celeron®  
Processor family  
(64 MB or more is  
recommended)  
800 MHz or higher; Intel®  
Pentium® /Celeron®  
USB Driver for Windows Windows Vista/XP  
at least 3 MB of free  
space  
512 MB or more  
Vista/XP x64  
Professional x64 Edition  
Processor family or Intel®  
64 compatible processor  
400 MHz or higher  
Windows XP Home/  
Professional Edition,  
Service Pack 1a (SP1a)  
more/Windows Vista  
* Only 32-bit is supported.  
processor clock speed  
(Intel® Pentium®/Celeron®  
Processor family, or  
compatible processor  
recommended)  
128 MB or more  
(256 MB or more  
is recommended)  
Digital Music Notebook  
1024 x 768  
HighColor  
(16-bit)  
at least 150 MB of  
free space  
Digital Music Notebook  
(Requirements for  
playing content with  
video included.)  
1 GHz or higher; Intel®  
Pentium®/Celeron®  
Processor family (1.4 GHz  
or more is recommended)  
Windows 2000/XP Home  
Edition/XP Professional/  
Vista  
256 MB or more  
* Only 32-bit is supported.  
Software Installation  
Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ●  
Uninstall (Removing the Software)  
In order to be able to communicate with and use  
MIDI devices connected to your computer, the  
appropriate driver software must be properly  
installed on your computer.  
The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software  
and similar applications on your computer to trans-  
mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI  
devices via a USB cable.  
Installed software can be removed from your  
computer as follows:  
From the Windows Start menu select Start  
Settings Control panel Add or Remove  
Applications Install and Uninstall. Select the  
item you want to remove and click [Add or  
Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to  
remove the selected software.  
NOTE  
Computer  
• The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on  
the OS version you are using.  
Sequence  
software  
USB  
Cable  
MIDI device  
Driver  
• Windows 2000 installation page 114.  
• Windows XP installation page 114.  
• Windows Vista installation page 115.  
Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you  
will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is  
displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My  
Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-  
ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
Installing the driver on Windows 2000  
Installing the driver on Windows XP  
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-  
trator” account to log on to Windows  
2000.  
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-  
trator” account to log on to Windows XP.  
1
1
2
Select [Start] [Control Panel]. If the  
control panel appears as “Pick a cate-  
gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in  
the upper left of the window. All control  
panels and icons will be displayed.  
Select [My Computer] [Control Panel]  
2
[System] [Hardware] [Driver Sign-  
ing] [File Signature Verification], and  
check the radio button to the left of  
“Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file  
signature” and click [OK].  
Go to [System] [Hardware] [Driver  
Signing Options] and check the radio but-  
ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].  
3
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-  
ROM drive. A start window will appear  
automatically.  
3
Click the [OK] button to close System  
4
Properties, and then clickXin the upper  
right of the window to close the Control  
Panel.  
First, make sure the POWER switch on the  
4
MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB  
cable to connect the MIDI device to the  
computer. After making the connections,  
turn on the power of the MIDI device.The  
system automatically launches the Found  
New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next]. (Some  
computers may take a while to display the  
Wizard window.)  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-  
ROM drive. A start window will appear  
automatically.  
5
First, make sure the POWER switch on the  
6
MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB  
cable to connect the MIDI device to the  
computer. After making the connections,  
turn on the power of the MIDI device.  
The system launches the Found New  
Hardware Wizard automatically. Other-  
wise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the  
section of the Owner’s Manual. If the sys-  
tem displays “Found New Hardware” in  
the lower right corner, wait until Wizard  
windows is displayed. (Some computers  
may take a while to display the window.)  
If the Wizard window prompts you to specify  
whether or not to connect to Windows Update,  
select the radio button for “No, not this time”,  
then click [Next].  
of the Owner’s Manual.  
Select the radio button for “Search for a  
suitable driver for my device [recom-  
mended]”, then click [Next].  
5
Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,  
deselect all other check boxes, then click  
[Next].  
6
NOTE  
• If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during  
detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,  
D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.  
Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-  
ers”, then click [Next].  
Select the radio button for “Install the  
software automatically (recommended)”,  
then click [Next].  
7
7
NOTE  
• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to  
install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].  
NOTE  
• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-  
dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click  
[Continue Anyway].  
When the installation is complete, the  
8
Wizard displays “Completing the Found  
New Hardware Wizard”.  
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a  
while to display the Wizard window.)  
When the installation is complete, the  
Wizard displays “Completing the Found  
New Hardware Wizard”.  
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a  
while to display the Wizard window.)  
8
Restart the computer.  
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.  
9
Restart the computer.  
9
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in  
the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-  
dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a  
while to display the Wizard window.)  
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.  
114 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
(Some computers may take a while to display the  
window.)  
NOTE  
• This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Profes-  
sional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.  
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.  
When using Windows XP Professional  
x64 Edition, the Support Module must  
be installed.  
10  
Installing the Musicsoft  
Downloader and Digital  
After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the  
connected USB devices, select “My Computer”  
from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM  
icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu.  
Select “USBdrvVista_”  
“XPx64SupportModule” “Setup.exe” and  
launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen direc-  
tions.  
Music Notebook Applications● ● ●  
IMPORTANT  
You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order  
to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows  
2000, XP or Vista.  
You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order  
to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows  
XP or Vista.  
IMPORTANT  
NOTE  
• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-  
net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.  
• Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,  
even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-  
MIDI driver.  
IMPORTANT  
• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-  
book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for  
some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make  
sure that your credit card can be used.  
Installing the driver in Windows Vista  
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-  
trator” account to log on to Windows Vista.  
1
NOTE  
• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS  
SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to  
when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at  
the end of this manual before using the application.  
Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-  
ROM drive. A start window will appear  
automatically.  
2
First, make sure the POWER switch on the  
Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your  
3
1
MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB  
cable to connect the MIDI device to the  
computer. After making the connections,  
turn on the power of the MIDI device.The  
system automatically launches theFound  
New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and  
install driver software (recommended)”.  
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the  
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-  
tion of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers  
may take a while to display the window.).  
computer’s CD-ROM drive.The start win-  
dow will appear automatically showing  
software applications.  
NOTE  
• If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your  
“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and  
select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and  
proceed to step 2, below.  
Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital  
Music Notebook].  
2
3
Click the [install] button, and follow the  
on-screen instructions to install the soft-  
ware.  
NOTE  
• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].  
For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-  
tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music  
Notebook application and click “Help”.  
If a message allowing Windows to search  
online for driver software appears, click  
“Don’t search online.”  
4
For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions  
see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft  
Downloader application and click “Help”.  
If a message prompting you to insert the  
disk that came with your device appears,  
click [Next].  
5
The system starts the installation.  
* You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft  
Downloader at the following Internet URL.  
NOTE  
• If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is  
authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].  
http://music.yamaha.com/download/  
IMPORTANT  
• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between  
this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application  
can be used.  
When the installation is complete, the  
6
system displays the message “The soft-  
ware for this device has been success-  
fully installed.Click [Close].  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
Troubleshooting  
The driver cannot be installed.  
When controlling the instrument from  
your computer via USB, the instrument  
does not operate correctly or no sound  
is heard.  
• Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the  
USB cable, then connect it again.  
• Did you install the driver? (page 113)  
• Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
• Is the USB function enabled on your com-  
puter?  
When you connect the instrument to the  
computer for the first time, if the “Add New  
Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB  
function on the computer may be disabled.  
Perform the following steps.  
• Are the volume settings of the instrument,  
playback device, and application program set  
to the appropriate levels?  
• Have you selected an appropriate port in the  
sequence software?  
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System] ➔  
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-  
dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔  
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).  
* Classic View only in Windows XP.  
• Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver?  
The latest driver can be downloaded from the  
following web site.  
http://music.yamaha.com/download/  
2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear  
at “Universal serial bus controller” or  
“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”  
mark, the USB controller is disabled.  
Playback response is delayed.  
• Does your computer satisfy the system  
requirements?  
• Is any unknown device registered?  
If driver installation fails, the instrument will be  
marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will  
not be able to install the driver. Delete the  
“Unknown device” by following the steps below.  
• Is any other application or device driver run-  
ning?  
1 Select [Control Panel]* [System] ➔  
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-  
dows 2000/XP), or select [Control Panel] ➔  
[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).  
* Classic View only in Windows XP.  
Cannot suspend or resume the com-  
puter correctly.  
• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI  
application is running.  
You may not be able to suspend/resume  
normally, depending on the particular  
environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even  
so, simply disconnecting and connecting the  
USB cable will allow you to use the instrument  
functions again.  
2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu  
“View devices by type”.  
3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it  
to extend the tree to look for “Unknown  
device”. If one appears, select it and click  
the [Remove] button.  
4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-  
ment, and make the connection again.  
5 Install the driver again.  
• Windows 2000 users..... see page 114  
• Windows XP users........ see page 114  
• Windows Vista users .... see page 115  
116 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide  
How can I remove the driver?  
[Windows 2000/XP/Vista]  
1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis-  
trator” account to log on Windows.  
Close all applications and windows that are  
open.  
2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-  
ROM drive.  
3 Select “My Computer” from the Start  
menu.  
4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select  
“Open” from the pop-up menu.  
5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_”  
folder  
“uninstall” folder  
“uninstall.exe” file and launch  
“uninstall.exe.le.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall  
the driver.  
NOTE  
• When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.from  
“USBdrvVista_” folder.  
NOTE  
• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].  
6 A message asking you to restart your  
computer in order to complete the  
uninstall procedure will appear.  
Driver removal will be complete when you  
have restarted your computer.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
For the Instrument  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical  
sound is temporarily produced.  
power.  
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-  
duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it  
further away from the instrument.  
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.  
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on  
the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,  
no sound is output.  
There is no sound even when the keyboard is  
played or when a song or style is being played  
back.  
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 106.)  
Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,  
etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is  
showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.  
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard When using the Dictionary function (page 87), the keys in the right  
does not produce any sound.  
hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.  
The style or song does not play back when the  
[START/STOP] button is pressed.  
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;  
refer to “External Clock” on page 106.  
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 93) is set to an appropriate  
level.  
Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-  
ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 82).  
The style does not sound properly.  
Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing  
press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.  
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the  
[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting  
style number 131 or a style between 143–160  
(Pianist).  
This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–  
160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other  
parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment  
range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.  
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the  
Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing  
back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-  
len”) from the accompaniment or song.  
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound  
seems to be cut off.  
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the  
opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-  
switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains  
the sounds.  
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-  
switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning  
on the power.  
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple  
recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-  
board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different  
from note to note.  
The sound of the voice changes from note to note.  
The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or  
there are Japanese characters in the display mes-  
sages.  
Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to  
118 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The appropriate display does not appear when the  
[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or  
[VOICE] button is pressed.  
Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return  
to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.  
The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is  
played.  
Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.  
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.  
The ACMP indicator does not appear when the  
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.  
Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when  
you are going to use any style-related function.  
The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their  
type. Types 01–10, 13 function when style playback is on, chords are  
played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is  
played in the right-hand range. Types 15–26 will function whether  
style playback is on or off. For types 23–26 you need to play two  
notes at the same time.  
There is no harmony sound.  
The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of  
area of the MAIN display and the USB device  
does not respond.  
the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the  
USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
LCD Message  
Comment  
Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash  
memory.  
Access error!  
Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power  
off during data transmission.  
All Memory Clearing...  
Are you sure?  
Backup Clearing...  
Cancel  
Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.  
Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory.  
Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.  
Displayed when a track clear error occurs.  
Can’t clear TrackA.  
Clearing...  
Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.  
Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected  
to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played  
back.  
Com Mode  
Completed  
Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmis-  
sion.  
Create Directory  
Data Error!  
Delete File  
Delete OK ?  
Delete Directory  
Deleting...  
End  
Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.  
Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.  
Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.  
Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not.  
Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.  
Displayed while the delete function is engaged.  
Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.  
Displayed when writing has failed.  
Error!  
Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropri-  
ate style has been selected during style record standby.  
Exit.  
Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total  
number of files have become too many.  
“File information area is not large enough.”  
File is not found.  
Indicates there is no file.  
Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too  
large.  
“File too large. Loading is impossible.”  
Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal  
flash memory.  
Flash Clearing...  
Format OK ? [EXECUTE]  
Formatting...  
Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not.  
Displayed while formatting.  
Load OK ?  
Confirms whether loading is executed or not.  
Displayed while loading data.  
Loading...  
Media is not inserted.  
Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.  
Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory  
becomes full.  
Media capacity is full.  
Memory Full  
Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.  
Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to  
proceed.  
“MIDI receive buffer overflow.”  
Move File  
Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.  
“Now Writing...  
(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise  
the data may be damaged.)”  
Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while  
writing. Doing so may result in data loss.  
120 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Messages  
LCD Message  
Comment  
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the  
overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO  
DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.  
OverCurrent  
Overwrite ?  
Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not.  
Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying  
scores and lyrics, or stopping recording.  
Please Wait...  
Rename File  
Save OK ?  
Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader.  
Confirms whether saving is executed or not.  
Saved data is not found.  
Saving...  
Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.  
Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while  
saving. Doing so may result in data loss.  
Send OK?  
Sending...  
Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not.  
Displayed while transmitting data.  
“Since the media is in use now, this  
function is not available.”  
Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the  
media is being accessed.  
Style data is too large to load.  
Sure ? [YES/NO]  
Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large.  
Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not.  
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory  
structure has become too complicated.  
“The limit of the media has been reached.”  
The media is not formatted.  
Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.  
Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-  
tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.  
“The media is write-protected.”  
“The song data is too large to be  
converted to notation.”  
Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too  
large.  
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files  
exceeds the capacity.  
There are too many files.  
“This function is not available now.”  
[nnn] “file name”  
Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is  
executing another job.  
Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the  
receiving block.  
NOTE  
• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-  
sary to be explained only.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scores  
This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.  
q
(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)  
Song No.  
9
=123  
Hallelujah Chorus  
122 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scores  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scores  
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-  
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the  
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.  
q
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)  
Song No.  
10  
=61  
Ave Maria  
P.A.T.  
Type =CHORD  
Your Turn.  
Repeatedly Play the Same Key.  
124 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scores  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scores  
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-  
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the  
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.  
q
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)  
Song No.  
11  
=108  
Nocturne op.9-2  
P.A.T.  
Type =CHORD/FREE  
126 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scores  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice List  
Maximum Polyphony  
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●  
NOTE  
The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means  
that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regard-  
less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a  
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment  
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the  
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the  
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is  
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most  
recent notes have priority (last note priority).  
• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for  
each voice. Use these program change numbers when  
playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.  
• Program change numbers are often specified as numbers  
“0–127.Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,  
in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-  
mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate  
sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program  
change number 1.  
• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long  
decay after the notes have been released while the sus-  
tain pedal (footswitch) is held.  
Panel Voice List  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Voice  
No.  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
Voice  
No.  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
Voice Name  
Voice Name  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
PIANO  
Live! Grand Piano  
BASS  
Finger Bass  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
113  
114  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
113  
001  
001  
001  
002  
007  
004  
003  
003  
050  
051  
052  
053  
054  
055  
056  
057  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
113  
113  
034  
033  
035  
036  
037  
039  
039  
040  
Live! Warm Grand Piano  
Grand Piano  
Bright Piano  
Acoustic Bass  
Pick Bass  
Fretless Bass  
Slap Bass  
Synth Bass  
Hi-Q Bass  
Dance Bass  
Harpsichord  
Honky-tonk Piano  
MIDI Grand Piano  
CP 80  
E.PIANO  
STRINGS  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
016  
017  
018  
019  
020  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
114  
118  
119  
120  
113  
112  
112  
114  
113  
114  
112  
113  
005  
005  
005  
005  
006  
005  
006  
006  
005  
008  
008  
008  
Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano  
Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano  
Cool! Electric Piano  
Phase Electric Piano  
Hyper Tines  
Funky Electric Piano  
DX Modern Electric Piano  
Venus Electric Piano  
Tremolo Electric Piano  
E.Clavichord  
058  
059  
060  
061  
062  
063  
064  
065  
066  
067  
068  
069  
070  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
116  
112  
112  
113  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
050  
049  
050  
050  
045  
051  
046  
041  
043  
044  
047  
106  
056  
Live! Orchestra  
String Ensemble  
Chamber Strings  
Slow Strings  
Tremolo Strings  
Synth Strings  
Pizzicato Strings  
Violin  
Cello  
Contrabass  
Harp  
Banjo  
Orchestra Hit  
Clavi  
WahClavi  
ORGAN  
021  
022  
023  
024  
025  
026  
027  
028  
029  
030  
031  
032  
033  
034  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
118  
117  
112  
113  
112  
114  
112  
116  
127  
121  
120  
113  
112  
112  
019  
019  
017  
017  
019  
019  
018  
017  
019  
020  
020  
020  
020  
021  
Cool! Organ  
CHOIR  
Cool! Rotor Organ  
Jazz Organ 1  
Jazz Organ 2  
Rock Organ  
Purple Organ  
Click Organ  
Bright Organ  
Theater Organ  
16'+2' Organ  
16'+4' Organ  
Chapel Organ  
Church Organ  
Reed Organ  
071  
072  
073  
074  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
113  
112  
112  
053  
053  
055  
054  
Choir  
Vocal Ensemble  
Air Choir  
Vox Humana  
SAXOPHONE  
075  
076  
077  
078  
079  
080  
081  
082  
083  
084  
085  
086  
087  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
117  
113  
114  
118  
112  
112  
112  
112  
114  
112  
112  
112  
112  
067  
065  
072  
067  
067  
066  
065  
068  
067  
072  
069  
070  
071  
Sweet! Tenor Sax  
Sweet! Soprano Sax  
Sweet! Clarinet  
Growl Sax  
Tenor Sax  
Alto Sax  
Soprano Sax  
Baritone Sax  
Breathy Tenor Sax  
Clarinet  
Oboe  
English Horn  
Bassoon  
ACCORDION  
035  
036  
037  
038  
039  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
113  
113  
113  
112  
022  
022  
024  
023  
023  
Musette Accordion  
Traditional Accordion  
Bandoneon  
Modern Harp  
Harmonica  
TRUMPET  
GUITAR  
088  
089  
090  
091  
092  
093  
094  
095  
096  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
115  
117  
114  
112  
112  
113  
112  
112  
112  
057  
058  
060  
057  
058  
058  
060  
061  
059  
Sweet! Trumpet  
Sweet! Trombone  
Sweet! Muted Trumpet  
Trumpet  
040  
041  
042  
043  
044  
045  
046  
047  
048  
049  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
112  
112  
117  
113  
112  
113  
112  
112  
112  
025  
026  
027  
028  
026  
028  
027  
029  
030  
031  
Classical Guitar  
Folk Guitar  
Jazz Guitar  
60’s Clean Guitar  
12Strings Guitar  
Clean Guitar  
Octave Guitar  
Muted Guitar  
Trombone  
Trombone Section  
Muted Trumpet  
French Horn  
Tuba  
Overdriven Guitar  
Distortion Guitar  
BRASS  
062  
097  
000  
112  
Brass Section  
128 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Voice List  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
062  
063  
062  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
006  
006  
006  
006  
007  
007  
007  
Voice  
No.  
Voice  
No.  
Voice Name  
Big Band Brass  
Voice Name  
Electric Piano 2  
Electric Piano 2 KSP  
Chorus Electric Piano 2  
DX + Analog Electric Piano  
Harpsichord  
Harpsichord KSP  
Harpsichord 2  
Clavi  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
157  
158  
*159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
001  
032  
041  
000  
001  
035  
000  
001  
098  
099  
100  
101  
102  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
113  
113  
119  
114  
112  
80’s Brass  
Mellow Horns  
Techno Brass  
Synth Brass  
063  
063  
FLUTE  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
114  
113  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
074  
076  
074  
073  
076  
075  
080  
Sweet! Flute  
Sweet! Pan Flute  
Flute  
008  
008  
Clavi KSP  
XG CHROMATIC  
Piccolo  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
064  
000  
001  
000  
001  
064  
097  
098  
000  
000  
096  
097  
000  
035  
096  
097  
009  
010  
011  
011  
012  
012  
013  
013  
013  
013  
013  
014  
015  
015  
015  
016  
016  
016  
016  
Celesta  
Pan Flute  
Recorder  
Ocarina  
Glockenspiel  
Music Box  
Orgel  
Vibraphone  
Vibraphone KSP  
Marimba  
Marimba KSP  
Sine Marimba  
Balimba  
Log Drums  
Xylophone  
Tubular Bells  
Church Bells  
Carillon  
SYNTH LEAD  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
112  
115  
119  
112  
112  
112  
081  
082  
082  
082  
099  
086  
101  
Square Lead  
Sawtooth Lead  
Analogon  
Fargo  
Star Dust  
Voice Lead  
Brightness  
SYNTH PAD  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
118  
112  
112  
112  
113  
113  
089  
092  
095  
089  
090  
101  
SweetHeaven  
Xenon Pad  
Equinox  
Fantasia  
Dark Moon  
Bell Pad  
Dulcimer  
Dulcimer 2  
Cimbalom  
Santur  
PERCUSSION  
XG ORGAN  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
012  
013  
014  
115  
009  
011  
015  
048  
Vibraphone  
Marimba  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
032  
033  
034  
035  
037  
040  
064  
065  
066  
067  
000  
024  
032  
033  
037  
000  
064  
065  
066  
000  
032  
035  
040  
064  
065  
000  
040  
000  
000  
032  
000  
064  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
017  
018  
018  
018  
018  
018  
019  
019  
019  
019  
020  
020  
020  
020  
020  
020  
021  
021  
022  
023  
023  
024  
024  
Drawbar Organ  
Detuned Drawbar Organ  
60’s Drawbar Organ 1  
60’s Drawbar Organ 2  
70’s Drawbar Organ 1  
60’s Drawbar Organ 3  
16+2'2/3  
Organ Bass  
70’s Drawbar Organ 2  
Cheezy Organ  
Drawbar Organ 2  
Percussive Organ  
70’s Percussive Organ  
Detuned Percussive Organ  
Light Organ  
Percussive Organ 2  
Rock Organ  
Rotary Organ  
Slow Rotary  
Fast Rotary  
Church Organ  
Church Organ 3  
Church Organ 2  
Notre Dame  
Organ Flute  
Tremolo Organ Flute  
Reed Organ  
Xylophone  
Steel Drums  
Celesta  
Music Box  
Tubular Bells  
Timpani  
DRUM KITS  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
127  
126  
126  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
001  
002  
009  
017  
025  
026  
113  
033  
041  
049  
001  
002  
Standard Kit 1  
Standard Kit 2  
Room Kit  
Rock Kit  
Electronic Kit  
Analog Kit  
Dance Kit  
Jazz Kit  
Brush Kit  
Symphony Kit  
SFX Kit 1  
SFX Kit 2  
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Voice  
No.  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
Voice Name  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
Puff Organ  
Accordion  
Harmonica  
Harmonica 2  
Tango Accordion  
Tango Accordion 2  
XG PIANO  
Grand Piano  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
001  
040  
041  
000  
001  
000  
001  
032  
000  
001  
000  
001  
032  
001  
001  
001  
001  
002  
002  
003  
003  
003  
004  
004  
005  
005  
005  
Grand Piano KSP  
Piano Strings  
Dream  
Bright Piano  
XG GUITAR  
Bright Piano KSP  
Electric Grand Piano  
Electric Grand Piano KSP  
Detuned CP80  
Honky-tonk Piano  
Honky-tonk Piano KSP  
Electric Piano 1  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
043  
096  
000  
035  
040  
041  
096  
000  
025  
025  
025  
026  
026  
026  
026  
026  
027  
Nylon Guitar  
Velocity Guitar Harmonics  
Ukulele  
Steel Guitar  
12-string Guitar  
Nylon & Steel Guitar  
Steel Guitar with Body Sound  
Mandolin  
Electric Piano 1 KSP  
Chorus Electric Piano 1  
Jazz Guitar  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice List  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
027  
028  
028  
029  
029  
029  
029  
030  
030  
031  
031  
031  
032  
032  
032  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
053  
053  
053  
053  
054  
055  
055  
055  
055  
056  
056  
056  
XG BRASS  
057  
057  
058  
058  
059  
060  
061  
061  
061  
061  
062  
062  
063  
063  
064  
064  
064  
Voice  
No.  
Voice  
No.  
Voice Name  
Voice Name  
Choir Aahs  
Stereo Choir  
Mellow Choir  
Choir Strings  
Voice Oohs  
Synth Voice  
Synth Voice 2  
Choral  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
032  
000  
032  
000  
040  
041  
045  
000  
043  
000  
040  
041  
000  
065  
066  
Jazz Amp  
297  
298  
299  
300  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
308  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
003  
032  
040  
000  
000  
040  
041  
064  
000  
035  
064  
Clean Guitar  
Chorus Guitar  
Muted Guitar  
Funk Guitar  
Muted Steel Guitar  
Jazz Man  
Overdriven Guitar  
Guitar Pinch  
Analog Voice  
Orchestra Hit  
Orchestra Hit 2  
Impact  
Distortion Guitar  
Feedback Guitar  
Feedback Guitar 2  
Guitar Harmonics  
Guitar Feedback  
Guitar Harmonics 2  
309  
310  
311  
312  
313  
314  
315  
316  
317  
318  
319  
320  
321  
322  
323  
324  
325  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
032  
000  
018  
000  
000  
000  
006  
032  
037  
000  
035  
000  
020  
000  
018  
041  
Trumpet  
Warm Trumpet  
Trombone  
Trombone 2  
Tuba  
XG BASS  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
257  
258  
259  
260  
261  
262  
263  
264  
265  
266  
267  
*268  
269  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
040  
045  
000  
018  
040  
043  
045  
065  
000  
028  
000  
032  
033  
034  
000  
032  
000  
043  
000  
040  
000  
006  
012  
018  
019  
040  
041  
033  
033  
033  
034  
034  
034  
034  
034  
034  
035  
035  
036  
036  
036  
036  
037  
037  
038  
038  
039  
039  
040  
040  
040  
040  
040  
040  
040  
Acoustic Bass  
Jazz Rhythm  
Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass  
Finger Bass  
Finger Dark  
Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar  
Finger Slap Bass  
Finger Bass 2  
Modulated Bass  
Pick Bass  
Muted Pick Bass  
Fretless Bass  
Fretless Bass 2  
Fretless Bass 3  
Fretless Bass 4  
Slap Bass 1  
Punch Thumb Bass  
Slap Bass 2  
Velocity Switch Slap  
Synth Bass 1  
Techno Synth Bass  
Synth Bass 2  
Mellow Synth Bass  
Sequenced Bass  
Click Synth Bass  
Synth Bass 2 Dark  
Modular Synth Bass  
DX Bass  
Muted Trumpet  
French Horn  
French Horn Solo  
French Horn 2  
Horn Orchestra  
Brass Section  
Trumpet & Trombone Section  
Synth Brass 1  
Resonant Synth Brass  
Synth Brass 2  
Soft Brass  
Choir Brass  
XG REED  
326  
327  
328  
329  
330  
331  
332  
333  
334  
335  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
040  
000  
040  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
065  
066  
066  
067  
067  
068  
069  
070  
071  
072  
Soprano Sax  
Alto Sax  
Sax Section  
Tenor Sax  
Breathy Tenor Sax  
Baritone Sax  
Oboe  
English Horn  
Bassoon  
Clarinet  
XG PIPE  
336  
337  
338  
339  
340  
341  
342  
343  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
073  
074  
075  
076  
077  
078  
079  
080  
Piccolo  
Flute  
XG STRINGS  
Recorder  
Pan Flute  
Blown Bottle  
Shakuhachi  
Whistle  
270  
271  
272  
273  
274  
275  
276  
277  
278  
279  
280  
281  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
008  
000  
000  
000  
000  
008  
040  
000  
000  
040  
000  
041  
041  
042  
043  
044  
045  
045  
045  
046  
047  
047  
048  
Violin  
Slow Violin  
Viola  
Cello  
Contrabass  
Tremolo Strings  
Slow Tremolo Strings  
Suspense Strings  
Pizzicato Strings  
Orchestral Harp  
Yang Chin  
Ocarina  
XG SYNTH LEAD  
Square Lead  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
349  
350  
351  
352  
353  
354  
355  
356  
357  
358  
359  
360  
361  
362  
363  
364  
365  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
006  
008  
018  
019  
064  
065  
066  
000  
006  
008  
018  
019  
020  
096  
000  
065  
000  
000  
064  
000  
000  
081  
081  
081  
081  
081  
081  
081  
081  
082  
082  
082  
082  
082  
082  
082  
083  
083  
084  
085  
085  
086  
087  
Square Lead 2  
LM Square  
Hollow  
Shroud  
Mellow  
Timpani  
XG ENSEMBLE  
Solo Sine  
Sine Lead  
282  
283  
284  
285  
286  
287  
288  
289  
290  
291  
292  
293  
294  
295  
296  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
003  
008  
035  
040  
041  
042  
045  
000  
003  
008  
040  
041  
000  
000  
049  
049  
049  
049  
049  
049  
049  
049  
050  
050  
050  
050  
050  
051  
052  
Strings 1  
Stereo Strings  
Slow Strings  
60’s Strings  
Sawtooth Lead  
Sawtooth Lead 2  
Thick Sawtooth  
Dynamic Sawtooth  
Digital Sawtooth  
Big Lead  
Sequenced Analog  
Calliope Lead  
Pure Lead  
Orchestra  
Orchestra 2  
Tremolo Orchestra  
Velocity Strings  
Strings 2  
Stereo Slow Strings  
Legato Strings  
Warm Strings  
Kingdom  
Chiff Lead  
Charang Lead  
Distorted Lead  
Voice Lead  
Synth Strings 1  
Synth Strings 2  
Fifths Lead  
130 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice List  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
087  
088  
088  
Bank Select  
MIDI  
Program  
Change#  
(1–128)  
113  
113  
113  
113  
114  
115  
115  
115  
116  
116  
117  
117  
118  
118  
118  
Voice  
No.  
Voice  
No.  
Voice Name  
Voice Name  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
MSB LSB  
(0–127) (0–127)  
366  
367  
368  
369  
370  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
035  
000  
016  
064  
065  
Big Five  
435  
436  
437  
438  
439  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
449  
450  
451  
452  
453  
454  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
097  
098  
099  
100  
000  
000  
097  
098  
000  
096  
000  
096  
000  
064  
065  
066  
000  
064  
065  
000  
Altair  
Bass & Lead  
Big & Low  
Fat & Perky  
Soft Whirl  
Gamelan Gongs  
Stereo Gamelan Gongs  
Rama Cymbal  
Agogo  
Steel Drums  
Glass Percussion  
Thai Bells  
Woodblock  
Castanets  
Taiko Drum  
Gran Cassa  
088  
088  
XG SYNTH PAD  
371  
372  
373  
374  
375  
376  
377  
378  
379  
380  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
064  
000  
000  
000  
066  
000  
000  
000  
000  
089  
089  
090  
091  
092  
092  
093  
094  
095  
096  
New Age Pad  
Fantasy  
Warm Pad  
Poly Synth Pad  
Choir Pad  
Itopia  
Bowed Pad  
Metallic Pad  
Halo Pad  
Melodic Tom  
Melodic Tom 2  
Real Tom  
Sweep Pad  
118  
119  
119  
119  
Rock Tom  
XG SYNTH EFFECTS  
Synth Drum  
Analog Tom  
Electronic Percussion  
Reverse Cymbal  
381  
382  
383  
384  
385  
386  
387  
388  
389  
390  
391  
392  
393  
394  
395  
396  
397  
398  
399  
400  
401  
402  
403  
404  
405  
406  
407  
408  
409  
410  
411  
412  
413  
414  
415  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
065  
066  
000  
027  
000  
012  
014  
018  
035  
040  
041  
042  
065  
070  
071  
072  
000  
018  
019  
040  
064  
065  
066  
000  
000  
064  
065  
067  
068  
070  
071  
096  
000  
000  
097  
097  
097  
098  
098  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
099  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
101  
102  
102  
102  
102  
102  
102  
102  
102  
103  
104  
Rain  
African Wind  
Carib  
Sound Track  
Prologue  
120  
XG SOUND EFFECTS  
455  
456  
457  
458  
459  
460  
461  
462  
463  
464  
465  
466  
467  
468  
469  
470  
471  
472  
473  
474  
475  
476  
477  
478  
479  
480  
481  
482  
483  
484  
485  
486  
487  
488  
489  
490  
491  
492  
493  
494  
495  
496  
497  
498  
499  
500  
501  
502  
503  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
064  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
001  
002  
004  
017  
033  
034  
035  
036  
037  
038  
049  
050  
051  
056  
065  
066  
067  
068  
069  
070  
071  
081  
082  
083  
084  
085  
086  
087  
088  
089  
090  
091  
097  
098  
099  
100  
101  
113  
114  
115  
116  
Fret Noise  
Breath Noise  
Seashore  
Bird Tweet  
Telephone Ring  
Helicopter  
Applause  
Gunshot  
Cutting Noise  
Cutting Noise 2  
String Slap  
Flute Key Click  
Shower  
Crystal  
Synth Drum Comp  
Popcorn  
Tiny Bells  
Round Glockenspiel  
Glockenspiel Chimes  
Clear Bells  
Chorus Bells  
Soft Crystal  
Air Bells  
Bell Harp  
Gamelimba  
Atmosphere  
Warm Atmosphere  
Hollow Release  
Nylon Electric Piano  
Nylon Harp  
Harp Vox  
Atmosphere Pad  
Brightness  
Goblins  
Thunder  
Wind  
Stream  
Bubble  
Feed  
Dog  
Horse  
Bird Tweet 2  
Maou  
Goblins Synth  
Creeper  
Phone Call  
Door Squeak  
Door Slam  
Scratch Cut  
Scratch Split  
Wind Chime  
Telephone Ring 2  
Car Engine Ignition  
Car Tires Squeal  
Car Passing  
Car Crash  
Siren  
Ritual  
To Heaven  
Night  
Glisten  
Bell Choir  
Echoes  
Sci-Fi  
XG WORLD  
416  
417  
418  
419  
420  
421  
422  
423  
424  
425  
426  
427  
428  
429  
430  
431  
432  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
000  
032  
035  
097  
000  
028  
096  
097  
098  
000  
000  
096  
097  
000  
000  
000  
000  
105  
105  
105  
105  
106  
106  
106  
106  
106  
107  
108  
108  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
Sitar  
Detuned Sitar  
Sitar 2  
Train  
Jet Plane  
Starship  
Tamboura  
Banjo  
Muted Banjo  
Rabab  
Gopichant  
Oud  
Burst  
Roller Coaster  
Submarine  
Laugh  
Shamisen  
Koto  
Scream  
Punch  
Taisho-kin  
Kanoon  
Kalimba  
Bagpipe  
Fiddle  
Heartbeat  
Footsteps  
Machine Gun  
Laser Gun  
Explosion  
Firework  
Shanai  
XG PERCUSSIVE  
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.  
433  
434  
000  
000  
000  
096  
113  
113  
Tinkle Bell  
Bonang  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Kit List  
• “  
” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.  
• Each percussion voice uses one note.  
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in  
“131: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).  
• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.  
• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed  
to be played alternately with each other.)  
Voice No.  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)  
127/000/001  
127/000/002  
127/000/009  
127/000/017  
127/000/025  
127/000/026  
Keyboard  
Note# Note Note# Note  
25 C# 13 C# -1  
26 14 -1  
MIDI  
Key Alternate  
Standard Kit 1  
Standard Kit 2  
Room Kit  
Rock Kit  
Electronic Kit  
Analog Kit  
Off  
assign  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
3
Surdo Mute  
Surdo Open  
Hi Q  
Whip Slap  
Scratch H  
C#0  
D#0  
D
D
D0  
27 D#  
15 D# -1  
E0  
F0  
28  
29  
E
F
16  
17  
E
F
-1  
-1  
4
4
30 F#  
31  
32 G#  
33  
18 F# -1  
19 -1  
20 G# -1  
21 -1  
Scratch L  
F#0  
G#0  
A#0  
G
G
Finger Snap  
Click Noise  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Seq Click L  
Seq Click H  
Brush Tap  
Brush Swirl  
Brush Slap  
Brush Tap Swirl  
Snare Roll  
Castanet  
Snare Soft  
Sticks  
Kick Soft  
Open Rim Shot  
Kick Tight  
Kick  
G0  
A0  
A
A
34 A#  
22 A# -1  
B0  
C1  
35  
36  
B
C
23  
24  
B
C
-1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
37 C#  
25 C#  
C#1  
D#1  
D1  
38  
D
26  
D
O
39 D#  
27 D#  
E1  
F1  
40  
41  
E
F
28  
29  
E
F
O
O
Reverse Cymbal  
Hi Q 2  
Reverse Cymbal  
Hi Q 2  
Snare Roll 2  
Snare Soft 2  
42 F#  
43  
44 G#  
45  
30 F#  
31  
32 G#  
33  
F#1  
G#1  
A#1  
G1  
A1  
G
G
Snare Noisy  
Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4  
A
A
Kick Tight 2  
Kick 3  
Kick Tight 2  
46 A#  
34 A#  
Open Rim Shot H Short  
Kick Tight Short  
Kick Short  
B1  
C2  
47  
48  
B
C
35  
36  
B
C
Kick 2  
Kick Gate  
Kick Gate  
Kick Gate Heavy  
Kick Analog Short  
Kick Analog  
Side Stick Analog  
Snare Analog  
C#2  
D#2  
49 C#  
37 C#  
Side Stick  
Snare  
D2  
50  
D
38  
D
Snare Short  
Snare Snappy  
Snare Rock  
Snare Noisy 2  
51 D#  
39 D#  
Hand Clap  
Snare Tight  
Floor Tom L  
Hi-Hat Closed  
Floor Tom H  
Hi-Hat Pedal  
Low Tom  
Hi-Hat Open  
Mid Tom L  
Mid Tom H  
Crash Cymbal 1  
High Tom  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Cymbal Cup  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
E2  
F2  
52  
53  
E
F
40  
41  
E
F
Snare Tight H  
Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim  
Snare Noisy 3  
Tom Electro 1  
Snare Analog 2  
Tom Analog 1  
Hi-Hat Closed Analog  
Tom Analog 2  
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2  
Tom Analog 3  
Hi-Hat Open Analog  
Tom Analog 4  
Tom Room 1  
Tom Room 2  
Tom Room 3  
Tom Rock 1  
Tom Rock 2  
Tom Rock 3  
F#2  
G#2  
A#2  
54 F#  
55  
56 G#  
57  
42 F#  
43  
44 G#  
45  
1
1
1
G2  
A2  
G
G
Tom Electro 2  
Tom Electro 3  
A
A
58 A#  
46 A#  
B2  
C3  
59  
60  
B
C
47  
48  
B
C
Tom Room 4  
Tom Room 5  
Tom Rock 4  
Tom Rock 5  
Tom Electro 4  
Tom Electro 5  
Tom Analog 5  
Crash Analog  
Tom Analog 6  
C#3  
D#3  
61 C#  
49 C#  
D3  
62  
D
50  
D
Tom Room 6  
Tom Rock 6  
Tom Electro 6  
63 D#  
51 D#  
E3  
F3  
64  
65  
E
F
52  
53  
E
F
F#3  
G#3  
A#3  
66 F#  
67  
68 G#  
69  
54 F#  
55  
56 G#  
57  
G3  
A3  
G
G
Cowbell Analog  
A
A
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibraslap  
Ride Cymbal 2  
Bongo H  
70 A#  
58 A#  
B3  
C4  
71  
72  
B
C
59  
60  
B
C
C#4  
D#4  
73 C#  
61 C#  
Bongo L  
D4  
74  
D
62  
D
Conga H Mute  
Conga H Open  
Conga L  
Timbale H  
Timbale L  
Agogo H  
Agogo L  
Cabasa  
Maracas  
Samba Whistle H  
Samba Whistle L  
Guiro Short  
Guiro Long  
Claves  
Wood Block H  
Wood Block L  
Cuica Mute  
Cuica Open  
Triangle Mute  
Triangle Open  
Shaker  
Conga Analog H  
Conga Analog M  
Conga Analog L  
75 D#  
63 D#  
E4  
F4  
76  
77  
E
F
64  
65  
E
F
F#4  
G#4  
A#4  
78 F#  
79  
80 G#  
81  
66 F#  
67  
68 G#  
69  
G4  
A4  
G
G
A
A
82 A#  
70 A#  
Maracas 2  
Claves 2  
B4  
C5  
83  
84  
B
C
71  
72  
B
C
O
O
C#5  
D#5  
85 C#  
73 C#  
D5  
86  
D
74  
D
O
87 D#  
75 D#  
E5  
F5  
88  
89  
E
F
76  
77  
E
F
F#5  
G#5  
A#5  
90 F#  
91  
92 G#  
93  
78 F#  
79  
80 G#  
81  
Scratch H 2  
Scratch L 2  
Scratch H 2  
Scratch L 3  
G5  
A5  
G
G
2
2
A
A
94 A#  
82 A#  
B5  
C6  
95  
96  
B
C
83  
84  
B
C
Jingle Bells  
Bell Tree  
C#6  
D#6  
97 C#  
85 C#  
D6  
98  
D
86  
D
99 D#  
87 D#  
E6  
F6  
100  
101  
E
F
88  
89  
E
F
F#6  
102 F#  
90 F#  
G6  
103  
G
91  
G
132 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Drum Kit List  
Voice No.  
131  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)  
127/000/001  
127/000/113  
127/000/033  
127/000/041  
127/000/049  
126/000/001  
126/000/002  
Keyboard  
Note# Note Note# Note  
25 C# 13 C# -1  
26 14 -1  
MIDI  
Key Alternate  
Standard Kit 1  
Dance Kit  
Jazz Kit  
Brush Kit  
Symphony Kit  
SFX Kit 1  
SFX Kit 2  
Off  
assign  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
3
Surdo Mute  
Surdo Open  
Hi Q  
Whip Slap  
Scratch H  
C#0  
D#0  
D
D
D0  
27 D#  
15 D# -1  
E0  
F0  
28  
29  
E
F
16  
17  
E
F
-1  
-1  
4
4
30 F#  
31  
32 G#  
33  
18 F# -1  
19 -1  
20 G# -1  
21 -1  
Scratch L  
F#0  
G#0  
A#0  
G
G
Finger Snap  
Click Noise  
Metronome Click  
Metronome Bell  
Seq Click L  
Seq Click H  
Brush Tap  
Brush Swirl  
Brush Slap  
Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal  
Snare Roll  
Castanet  
Snare Soft  
Sticks  
Kick Soft  
Open Rim Shot  
Kick Tight  
Kick  
Side Stick  
Snare  
Hand Clap  
Snare Tight  
Floor Tom L  
Hi-Hat Closed  
Floor Tom H  
Hi-Hat Pedal  
Low Tom  
Hi-Hat Open  
Mid Tom L  
Mid Tom H  
G0  
A0  
A
A
34 A#  
22 A# -1  
B0  
C1  
35  
36  
B
C
23  
24  
B
C
-1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
37 C#  
25 C#  
C#1  
D#1  
D1  
38  
D
26  
D
O
39 D#  
27 D#  
E1  
F1  
40  
41  
E
F
28  
29  
E
F
O
O
42 F#  
43  
44 G#  
45  
30 F#  
31  
32 G#  
33  
Hi Q 2  
Snare Techno  
F#1  
G#1  
A#1  
G1  
A1  
G
G
Snare Jazz H  
Brush Slap 2  
Kick Small  
A
A
Kick Techno Q  
Rim Gate  
Kick Techno L  
Kick Techno  
Side Stick Analog  
Snare Clap  
Kick Soft 2  
46 A#  
34 A#  
B1  
C2  
47  
48  
B
C
35  
36  
B
C
Gran Cassa  
Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise  
Kick Jazz  
Phone Call  
C#2  
D#2  
49 C#  
37 C#  
Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak  
D2  
50  
D
38  
D
Snare Jazz L  
Brush Slap 3 Band Snare  
Door Slam  
51 D#  
39 D#  
String Slap  
Scratch Cut  
Scratch H 3  
Wind Chime  
Telephone Ring 2  
E2  
F2  
52  
53  
E
F
40  
41  
E
F
Snare Dry  
Tom Analog 1  
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3  
Tom Analog 2  
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4  
Tom Analog 3  
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2  
Tom Analog 4  
Tom Analog 5  
Snare Jazz M  
Tom Jazz 1  
Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2  
Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1  
F#2  
G#2  
A#2  
54 F#  
55  
56 G#  
57  
42 F#  
43  
44 G#  
45  
1
1
1
G2  
A2  
G
G
Tom Jazz 2  
Tom Jazz 3  
Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2  
Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3  
A
A
58 A#  
46 A#  
B2  
C3  
59  
60  
B
C
47  
48  
B
C
Tom Jazz 4  
Tom Jazz 5  
Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4  
Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5  
Hand Cymbal  
C#3  
D#3  
61 C#  
49 C#  
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog  
High Tom  
D3  
62  
D
50  
D
Tom Analog 6  
Tom Jazz 6  
Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6  
63 D#  
51 D#  
Ride Cymbal 1  
Chinese Cymbal  
Ride Cymbal Cup  
Tambourine  
Splash Cymbal  
Cowbell  
Crash Cymbal 2  
Vibraslap  
Ride Cymbal 2  
Bongo H  
Hand Cymbal Short  
E3  
F3  
64  
65  
E
F
52  
53  
E
F
Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition  
Car Tires Squeal  
Car Passing  
Car Crash  
Siren  
Train  
Jet Plane  
Starship  
Burst  
Roller Coaster  
Submarine  
F#3  
G#3  
A#3  
66 F#  
67  
68 G#  
69  
54 F#  
55  
56 G#  
57  
G3  
A3  
G
G
Cowbell Analog  
A
A
Hand Cymbal 2  
70 A#  
58 A#  
B3  
C4  
71  
72  
B
C
59  
60  
B
C
Hand Cymbal 2 Short  
C#4  
D#4  
73 C#  
61 C#  
Bongo L  
D4  
74  
D
62  
D
Conga H Mute  
Conga H Open  
Conga L  
Timbale H  
Timbale L  
Agogo H  
Agogo L  
Cabasa  
Maracas  
Samba Whistle H  
Samba Whistle L  
Guiro Short  
Guiro Long  
Claves  
Wood Block H  
Wood Block L  
Cuica Mute  
Cuica Open  
Triangle Mute  
Triangle Open  
Shaker  
Conga Analog H  
Conga Analog M  
Conga Analog L  
75 D#  
63 D#  
E4  
F4  
76  
77  
E
F
64  
65  
E
F
F#4  
G#4  
A#4  
78 F#  
79  
80 G#  
81  
66 F#  
67  
68 G#  
69  
G4  
A4  
G
G
Shower  
Thunder  
Wind  
Stream  
Bubble  
Feed  
Laugh  
Scream  
Punch  
Heartbeat  
Footsteps  
A
A
82 A#  
70 A#  
Maracas 2  
Claves 2  
B4  
C5  
83  
84  
B
C
71  
72  
B
C
O
O
C#5  
D#5  
85 C#  
73 C#  
D5  
86  
D
74  
D
O
87 D#  
75 D#  
E5  
F5  
88  
89  
E
F
76  
77  
E
F
F#5  
G#5  
A#5  
90 F#  
91  
92 G#  
93  
78 F#  
79  
80 G#  
81  
Scratch H 2  
Scratch L 3  
G5  
A5  
G
G
2
2
A
A
94 A#  
82 A#  
B5  
C6  
95  
96  
B
C
83  
84  
B
C
Jingle Bells  
Bell Tree  
Dog  
Horse  
Bird Tweet 2  
Machine Gun  
Laser Gun  
Explosion  
Firework  
C#6  
D#6  
97 C#  
85 C#  
D6  
98  
D
86  
D
99 D#  
87 D#  
E6  
F6  
100  
101  
E
F
88  
89  
E
F
F#6  
102 F#  
90 F#  
G6  
103  
G
91  
G
Maou  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Style List  
Style No.  
Style Name  
8BEAT  
Style No.  
Style Name  
SaturdayNight  
Style No.  
111  
Style Name  
Quickstep  
56  
57  
58  
1
2
ChartPianoPop  
BritPopRock  
8BeatModern  
Cool8Beat  
DiscoChocolate  
DiscoHands  
SWING&JAZZ  
TradJazzPiano1  
TradJazzPiano2  
PianoBarBlues  
BigBandFast  
BigBandMedium  
BigBandBallad  
BigBandShuffle  
JazzClub  
112  
Tango  
113  
Pasodoble  
Samba  
3
114  
4
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
115  
ChaChaCha  
Rumba  
5
Classic8Beat  
60’sGuitarPop  
8BeatAdria  
60’s8Beat  
116  
6
117  
Jive  
7
TRADITIONAL  
USMarch  
8
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
9
BubblegumPop  
BritPopSwing  
OffBeat  
6-8March  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GermanMarch  
PolkaPop  
60’sRock  
Swing1  
OberPolka  
Tarantella  
HardRock  
Swing2  
RockShuffle  
8BeatRock  
16BEAT  
OrchestraSwing  
Five-Four  
Showtune  
ChristmasSwing  
ChristmasWaltz  
ScottishReel  
Hawaiian  
JazzBallad  
Dixieland  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
16Beat  
PianoPopShufle  
PopShuffle1  
PopShuffle2  
GuitarPop  
Ragtime  
AfroCuban  
Charleston  
R&B  
WALTZ  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
ItalianWaltz  
MariachiWaltz  
GuitarSerenade  
SwingWaltz  
JazzWaltz1  
JazzWaltz2  
CountryWaltz  
OberWaltzer  
Musette  
16BeatUptempo  
KoolShuffle  
JazzRock  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
Soul  
DetroitPop1  
60’sRock&Roll  
6-8Soul  
HipHopLight  
BALLAD  
CrocoTwist  
Rock&Roll  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
ChartPianoBld  
PopGtrBallad  
80’sBallad  
DetroitPop2  
BoogieWoogie  
ComboBoogie  
6-8Blues  
CHILDREN  
Learning2-4  
Learning4-4  
Learning6-8  
Fun 3-4  
PianoBallad  
LoveSong  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
6-8ModernEP  
6-8SlowRock  
6-8OrchBallad  
OrganBallad  
PopBallad  
COUNTRY  
70’sCountry  
Country8Beat  
CountryPop  
CountrySwing  
CountryBallad  
Country2-4  
CowboyBoogie  
CountryShuffle  
Bluegrass  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
Fun 4-4  
PIANIST  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
Stride  
16BeatBallad1  
16BeatBallad2  
DANCE  
PianoBlues1  
PianoBlues2  
PianoRag  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
ClubBeat  
PianoRock&Roll  
PianoBoogie  
PianoJazzWaltz  
PianoJazzBld  
Arpeggio  
Electronica  
FunkyHouse  
MellowHipHop  
EuroTrance  
Ibiza  
LATIN  
95  
96  
BrazilianSamba  
BossaNova  
PopBossa  
97  
Musical  
DreamDance  
TechnoPolis  
Clubdance  
ClubLatin  
98  
Tijuana  
Habanera  
99  
DiscoLatin  
SlowRock  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
Mambo  
8BtPianoBallad  
PianoMarch  
6-8PianoMarch  
PianoWaltz  
PianoBeguine  
PianoSwing  
Salsa  
Garage  
Beguine  
UKPop  
GuitarRumba  
RumbaFlamenco  
RumbaIsland  
Reggae  
HipHopGroove  
HipShuffle  
HipHopPop  
DISCO  
BALLROOM  
VienneseWaltz  
EnglishWaltz  
Slowfox  
52  
53  
54  
55  
70’sDisco1  
70’sDisco2  
LatinDisco  
107  
108  
109  
110  
DiscoPhilly  
Foxtrot  
134 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Music Database List  
MDB No.  
MDB Name  
MDB No.  
MDB Name  
MDB No.  
123  
MDB Name  
Shouting  
MDB No.  
MDB Name  
MDB No.  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
MDB Name  
Donald's  
MoonWlz  
MoulinHt  
Sunshine  
PieceOf  
ALL TIME HITS  
62  
WatchGrl  
COUNTRY  
1
Jude Hey  
New UK  
MyLoving  
All OK  
POP BALLAD  
124  
Rock&Rll  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
OnTheRd  
Breathe  
2
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
WnderLnd  
CanIStop  
EvryTime  
IvoryAnd  
TheWorld  
LovWoman  
Dolannes  
Madigan  
Paradise  
Whisper  
125  
HonkyTnk  
3
OLDIES  
InMyMind  
ContryHw  
GreenGrs  
EverNeed  
Lonesone  
Lucille  
4
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
Daydream  
Sumertme  
Diana's  
5
Buttercp  
JustCall  
GreenSlv  
TakeFour  
TexRose  
ThePolka  
Scarboro  
Edelweis  
AroundWd  
Whatever  
Yankee's  
6
7
CheepChp  
Daddy's  
Uptown  
Apache  
IGotIt  
8
9
Dance?  
HomeRng  
Tennesse  
LATIN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
GetBack  
GtrWheel  
HighTide  
IWasBorn  
Sailing  
Tonight  
MyPillow  
NoRain  
BALLAD  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
Bananabt  
DanceMng  
DntWorry  
Jamaica  
FleaSpa  
I'mPola  
73  
74  
AllOdds  
FInalDance  
SlpnLion  
Ghetto  
AtonalFl  
Hero  
WORLD  
BluJeans  
Holiday  
75  
257  
258  
259  
260  
261  
262  
263  
264  
265  
266  
267  
268  
269  
Hawaii  
76  
Woman  
LipsLcky  
PrettyWm  
TikiGtr  
D'amor  
Imagine  
77  
RunToYou  
LoveOfAl  
CndleWnd  
Cavatina  
Cherish  
ElCondor  
GoodbyRm  
ILandOn  
ItalyBel  
LoveMe  
78  
MamboJm  
OneNote  
PasoCani  
SayNoMor  
Beguine  
LetItBld  
79  
TurnThre  
Sherry  
LdyMdona  
YelowSub  
Marriage  
MovinOut  
My Shell  
NowNever  
DoLoveMe  
TcktRide  
SeeClear  
Masachus  
Hard Day  
USA Pie  
Norway  
80  
81  
DANCE & DISCO  
Cucarumb  
Puntuali  
Cielito  
82  
ToLoveMe  
YouKnow  
Evrythng  
EyesOfBl  
Hello  
143  
Babylon  
Goodbye  
Catch22  
DISCO  
83  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
Tijuana  
84  
Picture  
ItalySun  
SantaLuc  
Trumpetr  
VanMass  
85  
ENTERTAINMENT  
86  
Survival  
TheNavy  
DontHide  
Celebrat  
LondonRU  
10,2 Sun  
ShakeYou  
Believe  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
OnTheHil  
Barnacle  
Califrag  
87  
BeThere  
FlyAway  
LoveYou  
NeverLet  
JustOnce  
IfYouGo  
SavingAl  
InTheDrk  
LovePwr  
Vision  
88  
PIANIST  
89  
DadClock  
DanceLd  
DnceFire  
BigCntry  
Cabaret  
OdeToJoy  
Mi-Re-Do  
MyPrince  
Necesary  
NoBuiz  
270  
271  
272  
273  
274  
275  
276  
277  
278  
279  
280  
281  
282  
283  
284  
285  
286  
287  
288  
289  
290  
291  
292  
293  
294  
295  
296  
297  
298  
299  
300  
ItalySun  
BeGood  
Chaie's  
90  
91  
92  
Flower  
YesterBd  
93  
Frenetic  
Highwy66  
Leaves  
MODERN POP  
94  
BoySumer  
I'mSexy  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
Watches  
SoundMPH  
Hold Us  
95  
96  
StuffHot  
Miload  
97  
Beautifl  
SWING & JAZZ  
Cabaret  
Wonderfl  
Submarin  
Mi-Re-Do  
MoreRhum  
NoBuiz  
Unfound  
NeedSome  
PrtTmLvr  
MoonShdw  
NikitSng  
Sure of  
98  
AllAlone  
Opposite  
BeHonest  
SayYou  
158  
Patrol  
99  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
Charles  
NoisyOld  
Sleigh  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
GiveLove  
Rhythm  
RockBasy  
Magnifiq  
Magnfcnt  
SilentNt  
SayNthng  
Stranger  
OneDay  
TheBayou  
ThisSong  
Distance  
ThisWay  
LoveGone  
Inspirng  
TrueColr  
LOVE  
LeroyBad  
Caraban  
Misbehav  
Safari  
BeatifulSn  
OhBlah  
Off Day  
Tell Her  
Nabucco  
Standing  
SummerPl  
Christms  
Favorite  
Tubbie  
Charades  
Sally's  
GirlsMne  
NeedLove  
Smiling  
Nabucco  
Spanish  
SunnyStr  
MistyFln  
LdnBridg  
GrndClck  
Importnc  
Snowman  
Favorite  
SugerSpn  
Washngtn  
ThisWay  
ZipperD  
POP CLASSICS  
SoWhatIs  
TimeGone  
TasteHny  
Sandman  
Tunisian  
TwoFoot  
MyBaby  
R&B  
47  
Standing  
RainLaff  
Sunshine  
ForNamdo  
ThankFor  
ManPiano  
CoinLane  
LovesYou  
Tmbourin  
Alone  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
Turkish  
ROCK & ROLL  
12OClock  
112  
ShakenUp  
Beethovn  
HurryLov  
BeCruel  
WALTZ & TRADITIONAL  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
Blk&Whte  
CanCan  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
AsPlayed  
BabyGrov  
Highwy66  
SweetCHI  
JustU&Me  
ManLoves  
OurLove  
Wish I  
Charmain  
Musicbox  
Clementn  
Doodah!  
Dreamer  
EnterRag  
Birthday  
Jumping  
Countdwn  
SuePeggy  
Champion  
Jailhous  
GldField  
Raindrop  
SultanSw  
Life'sWk  
TopWorld  
BlueShoe  
Rockin24  
MaryLamb  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM  
File Name  
001Nutcr.mid  
002Orphe.mid  
003Slavo.mid  
004Prima.mid  
005Medit.mid  
006Guill.mid  
Song Name  
Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker”  
“Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture  
Slavonic Dances op.72-2  
La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni)  
Méditation (Thaïs)  
Composer  
P.I. Tchaikovsky  
J. Offenbach  
A. Dvorˇák  
A. Vivaldi  
J. Massenet  
G. Rossini  
Guillaume Tell  
007Fruhl.mid  
008Ungar.mid  
009Fruhl.mid  
010Dolly.mid  
011Cande.mid  
012Arabe.mid  
013Pasto.mid  
014Petit.mid  
015Innoc.mid  
016Progr.mid  
017Taren.mid  
018Cheva.mid  
019Etude.mid  
020Marci.mid  
021Turki.mid  
022Valse.mid  
023Menue.mid  
024Momen.mid  
025Enter.mid  
026Prelu.mid  
027Violl.mid  
028Angel.mid  
029Saraf.mid  
030Ameri.mid  
031Brown.mid  
032Lomon.mid  
033Bonni.mid  
034Londo.mid  
035Banjo.mid  
036Vogle.mid  
037Lorel.mid  
038Funic.mid  
039Turke.mid  
040Campt.mid  
041Jingl.mid  
042Muss.mid  
043Liebe.mid  
044Jesu.mid  
045Joy.mid  
Frühlingslied  
Ungarische Tänze Nr.5  
Frühlingsstimmen  
Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening  
La Candeur  
Arabesque  
Pastorale  
Petite Réunion  
Innocence  
Progrès  
Tarentelle  
La Chevaleresque  
Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu”  
Marcia alla Turca  
Turkish March  
Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien”  
Menuett  
Moments Musicaux op.94-3  
The Entertainer  
Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1)  
La Viollette  
Angels Serenade  
Krasnyj Sarafan  
America the Beautiful  
Little Brown Jug  
Loch Lomond  
My Bonnie  
Londonderry Air  
Ring de Banjo  
Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ?  
Die Lorelei  
Funiculi Funicula  
Turkey in the Straw  
Camptown Races  
Jingle Bells  
Muss i denn  
Liebesträume Nr.3  
Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring  
Ode to Joy  
F. Mendelssohn  
J. Brahms  
J. Strauss II  
T.Oesten  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
J.F.Burgmüller  
F.Chopin  
L.v. Beethoven  
W.A. Mozart  
F.Chopin  
L. Boccherini  
F. Schubert  
S. Joplin  
J.S. Bach  
L.Streabbog  
Traditional  
Traditional  
S.A. Ward  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
S.C. Foster  
Traditional  
F. Silcher  
L. Denza  
Traditional  
S.C. Foster  
J.S. Pierpont  
F. Silcher  
F. Liszt  
J.S. Bach  
L.v. Beethoven  
G. Bizet  
046Pearl.mid  
047Gavot.mid  
048Seren.mid  
049Menue.mid  
050Canon.mid  
051Vogel.mid  
052Piano.mid  
053Surpr.mid  
054WildR.mid  
055Chans.mid  
056Babbi.mid  
057RowRo.mid  
058Smoky.mid  
059WeWis.mid  
060ImMai.mid  
061Chris.mid  
062MaryH.mid  
063TenLi.mid  
064PopGo.mid  
065Twink.mid  
066Close.mid  
067Cucko.mid  
068Augus.mid  
069Londo.mid  
070Three.mid  
Pearl Fisher  
Gavotte  
Serenade/Haydn  
F.J. Gossec  
F.J. Haydn  
J.S. Bach  
J. Pachelbel  
W.A. Mozart  
L.v. Beethoven  
F.J. Haydn  
E.A. MacDowell  
G. Bizet  
Menuett BWV. Anh.114  
Canon in D  
Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte”  
Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein”  
The “Surprise” Symphony No.94  
To a Wild Rose  
Chanson du Toreador  
O Mio Babbino Caro  
Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET)  
On Top of Old Smoky (DUET)  
We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET)  
Im Mai (DUET)  
O Christmas Tree (DUET)  
Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET)  
Ten Little Indians (DUET)  
Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET)  
Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET)  
Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET)  
The Cuckoo (DUET)  
O du lieber Augustin (DUET)  
London Bridge (DUET)  
Three Blind Mice (DUET)  
G. Puccini  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
S. Winner  
Traditional  
Traditional  
J.J. Rousseau  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
Traditional  
The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.  
136 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Harmony Type List  
No.  
1
Harmony Type  
01(Standard Duet)  
02(Standard Trio)  
03(Full Chord)  
Description  
2
3
4
04(Rock Duet)  
5
05(Country Duet)  
06(Country Trio)  
6
Harmony types 01–10, 13 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the  
single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the  
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing  
songs that contain chord data.  
7
07(Block)  
8
08(4-Way Close 1)  
09(4-Way Close 2)  
10(4-Way Open)  
11(1+5)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
12(Octave)  
13(Strum)  
14(Multi Assign)  
15(Echo 1/4)  
16(Echo 1/6)  
17(Echo 1/8)  
18(Echo 1/12)  
19(Tremolo 1/8)  
20(Tremolo 1/12)  
21(Tremolo 1/16)  
22(Tremolo 1/32)  
23(Trill 1/12)  
Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with  
the auto accompaniment.These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not;  
however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 34). The individual  
note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings  
are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note  
triplets.  
• The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played.  
• The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four).  
• The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are  
held.  
24(Trill 1/16)  
25(Trill 1/24)  
26(Trill 1/32)  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effect Type List  
Reverb Types  
No.  
1
Type  
Description  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
HALL1  
2
HALL2  
1
16  
17  
18  
1
3
HALL3  
1
4
HALL4  
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.  
1
5
HALL5  
1
6
HALL M  
HALL L  
ROOM1  
ROOM2  
ROOM3  
ROOM4  
ROOM5  
ROOM6  
ROOM7  
ROOM S  
1
6
7
1
7
8
2
16  
17  
18  
19  
0
9
2
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
2
2
2
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.  
2
1
2
2
2
5
ROOM M  
ROOM L  
2
6
2
7
STAGE1  
3
16  
17  
0
STAGE2  
3
Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.  
Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.  
STAGE3  
3
STAGE4  
3
1
PLATE1  
4
16  
17  
0
PLATE2  
4
PLATE3  
4
GM PLATE  
WHITE ROOM  
TUNNEL  
CANYON  
BASEMENT  
NO EFFECT  
4
7
A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.  
Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right.  
A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.  
A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.  
No effect.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Chorus Types  
No.  
1
Type  
Description  
MSB  
66  
66  
66  
66  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
66  
66  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
68  
68  
66  
0
LSB  
17  
8
CHORUS1  
2
CHORUS2  
3
CHORUS3  
16  
1
4
CHORUS4  
5
CHORUS5  
2
6
CHORUS6  
0
7
CHORUS7  
Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.  
1
8
CHORUS8  
8
9
GM CHORUS1  
GM CHORUS2  
GM CHORUS3  
GM CHORUS4  
FB CHORUS  
CELESTE1  
CELESTE2  
FLANGER1  
FLANGER2  
FLANGER3  
FLANGER4  
FLANGER5  
GM FLANGER  
SYMPHONIC1  
SYMPHONIC2  
ROTARY SP5  
NO EFFECT  
3
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
4
5
6
7
0
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.  
Creates a sound reminiscent of a jet airplane.  
2
8
16  
17  
1
0
7
16  
0
Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.  
Simulates a rotary speaker.  
No effect.  
18  
0
138 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Effect Type List  
DSP Types  
No.  
Type  
Description  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
1
HALL1  
2
HALL2  
1
16  
17  
18  
1
3
HALL3  
1
4
HALL4  
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.  
1
5
HALL5  
1
6
HALL M  
HALL L  
1
6
7
1
7
8
ROOM1  
ROOM2  
ROOM3  
ROOM4  
ROOM5  
ROOM6  
ROOM7  
ROOM S  
ROOM M  
ROOM L  
STAGE1  
STAGE2  
STAGE3  
STAGE4  
PLATE1  
2
16  
17  
18  
19  
0
9
2
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
2
2
2
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.  
2
1
2
2
2
5
2
6
2
7
3
16  
17  
0
3
Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.  
Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.  
3
3
1
4
16  
17  
0
PLATE2  
4
PLATE3  
4
GM PLATE  
WHITE ROOM  
TUNNEL  
CANYON  
BASEMENT  
DELAY LCR1  
DELAY LCR2  
4
7
A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
5
0
Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right.  
A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.  
A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.  
0
0
0
16  
0
Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).  
5
Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are pro-  
vided.  
32  
33  
DELAY LR  
ECHO  
6
7
0
0
Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for  
L and R.  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
CROSS DELAY  
TEMPO DELAY  
TEMPO ECHO  
TEMPO CROSS  
KARAOKE1  
KARAOKE2  
KARAOKE3  
ER1  
The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed.  
Tempo-synchronized delay.  
8
0
0
8
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
17  
8
16  
1
2
0
1
8
3
4
5
6
7
0
2
21  
21  
22  
20  
20  
20  
9
Tempo-synchronized echo.  
Tempo-synchronized cross delay.  
Echo for karaoke.  
This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb.  
ER2  
9
GATE REVERB  
REVERS GATE  
CHORUS1  
Simulation of gated reverb.  
10  
11  
66  
66  
66  
66  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
66  
66  
Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse.  
CHORUS2  
CHORUS3  
CHORUS4  
CHORUS5  
CHORUS6  
CHORUS7  
Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.  
CHORUS8  
GM CHORUS1  
GM CHORUS2  
GM CHORUS3  
GM CHORUS4  
FB CHORUS  
CELESTE1  
CELESTE2  
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effect Type List  
No.  
Type  
Description  
MSB  
68  
LSB  
16  
0
60  
61  
SYMPHONIC1  
Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.  
SYMPHONIC2  
68  
ENS DETUNE  
(Ensemble Detune)  
Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-  
shifted sound.  
62  
87  
0
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
FLANGER1  
FLANGER2  
FLANGER3  
FLANGER4  
FLANGER5  
GM FLANGER  
T_FLANGER  
PHASER1  
67  
67  
8
16  
17  
1
67  
Creates a sound reminiscent of a jet airplane.  
67  
67  
0
67  
7
107  
72  
0
0
PHASER2  
72  
8
EP PHASER2  
EP PHASER3  
T_PHASER  
Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.  
72  
18  
16  
0
72  
108  
DIST HEAVY  
(Distortion Heavy)  
75  
76  
77  
Heavy distortion.  
Stereo distortion.  
73  
73  
73  
0
8
ST DIST  
(Stereo Distortion)  
COMP+DIST1  
(Compressor + Distortion1)  
16  
Since a Compressor is included in the first stage, steady distortion  
can be produced regardless of changes in input level.  
COMP+DIST2  
(Compressor + Distortion2)  
78  
79  
80  
73  
74  
74  
1
0
8
OVERDRIVE  
Adds mild distortion to the sound.  
Stereo Overdrive.  
ST OD  
(Stereo Overdrive)  
DIST HARD  
(Distortion Hard)  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
98  
98  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
75  
95  
95  
16  
22  
17  
23  
18  
19  
0
Hard-edge distortion.  
Soft, warm distortion.  
DIST HARD2  
(Distortion Hard2)  
DIST SOFT  
(Distortion Soft)  
DIST SOFT2  
(Distortion Soft2)  
ST DIST HARD  
(Stereo Distortion Hard)  
Hard-edge stereo distortion.  
Soft, warm soft distortion.  
ST DIST SOFT  
(Stereo Distortion Soft)  
V_DIST HARD  
(V Distortion Hard)  
Distortion which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds.  
A simulation of a guitar amp.  
V_DIST SOFT  
(V Distortion Soft)  
2
AMP SIM1  
(Amp Simulator 1)  
0
AMP SIM2  
(Amp Simulator 2)  
1
ST AMP1  
(Stereo Amp Simulator1)  
20  
21  
8
ST AMP2  
(Stereo Amp Simulator2)  
ST AMP3  
(Stereo Amp Simulator3)  
Stereo amp simulator.  
ST AMP4  
(Stereo Amp Simulator4)  
24  
25  
26  
16  
0
ST AMP5  
(Stereo Amp Simulator5)  
ST AMP6  
(Stereo Amp Simulator6)  
DST+DELAY1  
(Distortion + Delay1)  
Distortion and Delay are connected in series.  
DST+DELAY2  
(Distortion + Delay2)  
140 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Type List  
No.  
Type  
Description  
MSB  
LSB  
OD+DELAY1  
(Overdrive + Delay1)  
99  
95  
17  
Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.  
OD+DELAY2  
(Overdrive + Delay2)  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
95  
96  
1
16  
0
CMP+DST+DLY1  
(Compressor + Distortion + Delay1)  
Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.  
Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.  
CMP+DST+DLY2  
(Compressor + Distortion + Delay2)  
96  
CMP+OD+DLY1  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Delay1)  
96  
17  
1
CMP+OD+DLY2  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Delay2)  
96  
V_DST H+DLY  
(V Distortion Hard + Delay)  
V Distortion Hard and Delay are connected in series.  
V Distortion Soft and Delay are connected in series.  
Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
Compressor, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
98  
1
V_DST S+DLY  
(V Distortion Soft + Delay)  
98  
3
DST+TDLY  
(Distortion + Tempo Delay)  
100  
100  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
103  
103  
80  
0
OD+TDLY  
(Overdrive + Tempo Delay)  
1
CMP+DST+TDL  
(Compressor + Distortion + Tempo Delay)  
0
CMP+OD+TDLY1  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay1)  
1
CMP+OD+TDLY2  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay2)  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
0
CMP+OD+TDLY3  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay3)  
Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
CMP+OD+TDLY4  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay4)  
CMP+OD+TDLY5  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay5)  
CMP+OD+TDLY6  
(Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay6)  
V_DST H+TDLY  
(V Distortion Hard + Tempo Delay)  
V Distortion Hard and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
V Distortion Soft and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
V_DST S+TDL1  
(V Distortion Soft + Tempo Delay1)  
1
PITCH CHG1  
(Pitch Change1)  
16  
0
PITCH CHG2  
(Pitch Change2)  
Changes the pitch of the input signal.  
80  
PITCH CHG3  
(Pitch Change3)  
80  
1
121  
122  
AUTO WAH1  
AUTO WAH2  
78  
78  
16  
0
Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter.  
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion.  
AT WAH+DST1  
(Auto Wah + Distortion1)  
123  
124  
125  
126  
78  
78  
78  
78  
17  
1
AT WAH+DST2  
(Auto Wah + Distortion2)  
AT WAH+OD1  
(Auto Wah + Overdrive1)  
18  
2
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.  
AT WAH+OD2  
(Auto Wah + Overdrive2)  
127  
128  
TOUCH WAH1  
TOUCH WAH2  
82  
82  
0
8
Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input  
level.  
TC WAH+DST1  
(Touch Wah + Distortion1)  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
82  
82  
82  
82  
82  
16  
1
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion.  
TC WAH+DST2  
(Touch Wah + Distortion2)  
TC WAH+OD1  
(Touch Wah + Overdrive1)  
17  
2
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.  
Clavinet Touch Wah  
TC WAH+OD2  
(Touch Wah + Overdrive2)  
CLAVI TC WAH  
(Clavi Touch Wah)  
18  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Type List  
No.  
Type  
Description  
MSB  
LSB  
EP TC WAH  
(EP Touch Wah)  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
EP Touch Wah  
82  
19  
WH+DST+DLY1  
(Wah + Distortion + Delay1)  
97  
97  
16  
0
Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.  
Wah, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.  
WH+DST+DLY2  
(Wah + Distortion + Delay2)  
WH+DST+TDLY  
(Wah + Distortion + Tempo Delay)  
102  
97  
0
WH+OD+DLY1  
(Wah + Overdrive + Delay1)  
17  
1
WH+OD+DLY2  
(Wah + Overdrive + Delay2)  
97  
WH+OD+TDLY1  
(Wah + Overdrive + Tempo Delay1)  
102  
102  
105  
1
Wah, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.  
WH+OD+TDLY2  
(Wah + Overdrive + Tempo Delay2)  
16  
0
Multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the compression  
effect for individual frequency bands.  
MBAND COMP  
Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded.  
A sense of attack can also be added to the sound.  
143  
144  
145  
COMPRESSOR  
NOISE GATE  
83  
84  
69  
0
0
Gates the input when the input signal falls below a specified level.  
ROTARY SP1  
(Rotary Speaker1)  
16  
ROTARY SP2  
(Rotary Speaker2)  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
71  
71  
70  
66  
69  
71  
86  
69  
86  
69  
86  
69  
86  
99  
99  
17  
18  
17  
18  
0
ROTARY SP3  
(Rotary Speaker3)  
ROTARY SP4  
(Rotary Speaker4)  
Simulates a rotary speaker.  
ROTARY SP5  
(Rotary Speaker5)  
ROTARY SP6  
(Rotary Speaker6)  
ROTARY SP7  
(Rotary Speaker7)  
22  
0
2WAY ROT SP  
(2way Rotary Speaker)  
DST+ROT SP  
(Distortion + Rotary Speaker)  
Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series.  
Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.  
Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series.  
Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.  
Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series.  
Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series.  
1
DST+2ROT SP  
(Distortion + 2way Rotary Speaker)  
1
OD+ROT SP  
(Overdrive + Rotary Speaker)  
2
OD+2ROT SP  
(Overdrive + 2way Rotary Speaker)  
2
AMP+ROT SP  
(Amp Simulator + Rotary Speaker)  
3
AMP+2ROT SP  
(Amp Simulator + 2way Rotary Speaker)  
3
DUAL ROT SP1  
(Dual Rotor Speaker1)  
0
Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching.  
DUAL ROT SP2  
(Dual Rotor Speaker2)  
1
161  
162  
163  
164  
TREMOLO1  
TREMOLO2  
TREMOLO3  
EP TREMOLO  
70  
71  
70  
70  
16  
19  
0
18  
Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.  
GT TREMOLO1  
(Guitar Tremolo1)  
165  
166  
71  
70  
20  
19  
GT TREMOLO2  
(Guitar Tremolo2)  
167  
168  
169  
170  
AUTO PAN1  
AUTO PAN2  
EP AUTOPAN  
AUTO PAN3  
71  
71  
71  
71  
16  
0
Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position  
(left, right, front, back).  
21  
1
142 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Type List  
No.  
Type  
Description  
MSB  
LSB  
Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typi-  
cal in most disco music.  
171  
EQ DISCO  
EQ TEL  
76  
16  
Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate  
the sound heard through a telephone receiver.  
172  
76  
17  
173  
174  
2BAND EQ  
A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.  
A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.  
77  
76  
0
0
3BAND EQ  
HM ENHANCE1  
(Harmonic Enhancer1)  
175  
81  
16  
Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.  
HM ENHANCE2  
(Harmonic Enhancer2)  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
81  
76  
85  
88  
93  
0
18  
0
ST 3BAND EQ  
An EQ which allows equalization of low, mid and high bands.  
Attenuates the vocal part of a CD or other source.  
Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width.  
Adds a vowel sound to the input signal.  
VCE CANCEL  
(Voice Cancel)  
AMBIENCE  
0
TALKING MOD  
(Talking Modulation)  
0
181  
182  
183  
ISOLATOR  
NO EFFECT  
THRU  
Controls the level of a specified frequency band of the input signal.  
No effect.  
115  
0
0
0
0
Bypass without applying an effect.  
64  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
144 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MIDI Implementation Chart  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Data Format  
NOTE:  
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,  
llH, F7H  
• mm : Reverb Type MSB  
• ll : Reverb Type LSB  
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 138) for details.  
1
By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions  
as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming  
data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-  
ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel  
voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.  
• MIDI Master Tuning  
• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type,  
Chorus Type and DSP Type.  
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,  
llH, F7H  
• mm : Chorus Type MSB  
• ll : Chorus Type LSB  
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 138) for details.  
2
3
Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-  
mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-  
mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the  
Harmony effect.  
<DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH,  
F7H  
• mm: DSP Type MSB  
• ll: DSP Type LSB  
Refer to the Effect Type List (page 138) for details.  
Exclusive  
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H  
• This message automatically restores all default settings for  
the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.  
4
5
When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-  
mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is  
transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH  
(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-  
ognized.  
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H  
• This message allows the volume of all channels to be  
changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).  
• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values  
for “ll” are ignored.)  
Local ON/OFF  
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F  
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00  
Value for “n” is ignored.  
<XG Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 00H, 00H, 00H,  
ddH, ddH, ddH, ddH, F7H  
• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of  
all channels.  
• The values of “dd” are used for XG Master Tuning.  
• The default value of “dd” are 00H, 04H, 00H, 00H, respec-  
tively.  
146 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE  
ATTENTION  
You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your  
sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”  
and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER  
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-  
CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.  
SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,  
YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET  
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE  
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN  
THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.  
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (AGREE-  
MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE  
ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT  
IS BETWEENYOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND  
YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).  
BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING  
TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IFYOU DO NOT  
AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE  
USE THIS SOFTWARE.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT  
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)  
and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-  
WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.  
The SOFTWARE is owned byYamaha and/orYamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-  
tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While  
you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-  
WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-  
rights.  
YAMAHAS ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-  
MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO  
EVENT SHALLYAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-  
SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-  
ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-  
WARE, EVEN IFYAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall  
Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action  
(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-  
WARE.  
You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.  
You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for  
backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup  
copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduceYamaha’s copy-  
right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy  
of the SOFTWARE.  
7.THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE  
You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-  
WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads  
and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.  
Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be  
attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data  
accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as  
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide  
by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-  
WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is  
responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD  
PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD  
PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.  
Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-  
WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.  
Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the  
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.  
2. RESTRICTIONS  
You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or  
otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method  
whatsoever.  
You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-  
WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.  
You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to  
another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.  
You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-  
lates public policy.  
You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without  
permission byYamaha Corporation.  
Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained  
by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which  
you must observe.  
• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-  
mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.  
• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-  
ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public  
without permission of the copyright owner.  
Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,  
without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,  
expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-  
use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.  
8. GENERAL  
This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese  
law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-  
dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a  
court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-  
forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and  
effect.  
• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be  
removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission  
of the copyright owner.  
3.TERMINATION  
This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-  
WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-  
sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate  
automatically and immediately without notice fromYamaha. Upon such termi-  
nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-  
panying written documents and all copies thereof.  
9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT  
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with  
respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and  
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-  
ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or  
revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a  
fully authorized representative of Yamaha.  
4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA  
As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media,Yamaha warrants that the tangible  
media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-  
rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days  
from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt.Yamaha’s entire  
liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media  
if it is returned toYamaha or an authorizedYamaha dealer within fourteen days  
with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-  
aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT  
PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT  
By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which  
will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.  
The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors.  
1. Definitions  
4. Disclaimer of Liability  
In this License the following words and expressions have the  
following meanings:  
“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if  
permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in  
this agreement.  
“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One  
Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius  
Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK  
“Product”: the Software and the Documentation.  
“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus,  
Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or  
files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the  
Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer.  
“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the  
Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.  
4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed  
hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all  
warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or  
implied, including without limitation any warranties that the  
Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with  
the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular  
purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any  
liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including  
without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data  
and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special,  
indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in  
connection with your installation and use of the Product.  
5. Termination  
5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your  
destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect  
to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by  
you of any condition of this License or of any of your  
representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.  
Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will  
immediately delete the Software from your computer and  
destroy the Documentation.  
2. License  
2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable  
license to use this Software in accordance with the  
Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the  
Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product  
remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the  
rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are  
reserved.  
6. Miscellaneous  
6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of  
the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder  
shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial  
exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or  
further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power  
or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in  
connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies  
provided by law.  
2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the  
Documentation provided in electronic form.You shall not make  
or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part  
of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form.  
2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,  
(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any  
part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for  
the purpose of error correction);  
6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or  
otherwise transfer the Product to any third party.  
(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the  
whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or  
incorporated into any other program, file or product, for  
any purpose; or  
(3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than  
temporary files created and required by your computer’s  
operating system or web browser), including without  
limitation screen capture files, files generated from the  
Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any  
purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the  
Software) for private non-commercial use.  
6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with  
the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on  
www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.  
6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final  
expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter  
hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of  
such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior  
understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the  
Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.  
6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European  
Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the  
laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the  
exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.  
2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,  
decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the  
Software in whole or in part for any purpose.  
2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate,  
convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being  
read by any copy or version of the Software or any data  
transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in  
whole or in part for any purpose.  
6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the  
European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced  
in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of  
California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in  
any way related or connected to this License shall be brought  
and maintained only in the United States District Court for the  
Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San  
Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of  
such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding.  
Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial  
by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any  
counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in  
any way related or connected to this License or the subject  
matter hereof.  
2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any  
right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or  
any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity.  
3. Copyright  
3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and  
in the components of the Product as between you and the  
Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is  
protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all  
other applicable laws.  
(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)  
148 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Keyboards  
• 88 Graded Hammer Standard keys (A-1–C7),  
with Touch Response.  
Song  
• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs  
(70)  
• Song Clear, Track Clear  
• Song Volume  
• Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,  
REW, FF, START/STOP  
Display  
• 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)  
Setup  
• STANDBY/ON  
• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX  
• LCD CONTRAST  
Performance assistant technology  
• Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody  
Recording  
Panel Controls  
• Song  
• SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER,  
P.A.T. ON/OFF, LESSON L, LESSON R, LESSON START,  
METRONOME ON/OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO,  
FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, HARMONY ON/OFF,  
DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+],  
[-], CATEGORY, Dial, REPEAT & LEARN (ACMP ON/OFF),  
A-B REPEAT (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), PAUSE (SYNC START),  
START/STOP, REW (MAIN/AUTO FILL), FF (SYNC STOP),  
REGIST MEMORY ([MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]),  
SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]), File Control [MENU],  
File Control [EXECUTE], [EXIT], [LYRICS], [SCORE],  
DSP ON/OFF  
User Song:  
Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE  
5 Songs  
MIDI  
• Local On/Off  
• Keyboard Out  
• Initial Send  
• Style Out  
• External Clock  
• Song Out  
Auxiliary jacks  
• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST,  
USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN, PEDAL UNIT  
Amplifier  
• 6W + 6W  
Realtime Control  
• Pitch Bend Wheel  
Speakers  
• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2  
Voice  
Power Consumption  
• 22W  
• 130 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices  
• Polyphony: 64  
• DUAL  
• SPLIT  
Power Supply  
• Adaptor: PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha  
Dimensions (W x D x H)  
• 1,398 x 457 x 153 mm (55-1/16" x 18" x 6")  
with keyboard stand:  
Style  
• 160 Preset Styles + External files  
• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START,  
START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,  
MAIN/AUTO FILL  
1,405 x 485 x 773 mm (55-1/3" x 19-1/8" x 30-3/8")  
Weight  
• 18.0kg (39 lbs. 11 oz.)  
with keyboard stand: 25.5kg (56 lbs. 3 oz.)  
• Fingering:  
• Style Volume  
Multi Finger, Full Keyboard  
Supplied Accessories  
• Music Rest  
• Keyboard Stand  
• AC Power adaptor (May not be included depending on your par-  
ticular area.)  
Music Database  
• 300 + External files  
• Accessory CD-ROM  
• Owner’s Manual  
• Footswitch FC5  
Education Feature  
• Dictionary  
• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn  
Registration Memory  
Optional Accessories  
• Headphones: HPE-150  
• Pedal Unit: LP-7  
• 8 banks x 2 types  
Function  
• VOLUME:  
• OVERALL:  
Style Volume, Song Volume  
Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitiv-  
ity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering  
*
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for infor-  
mation purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or  
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.  
Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in  
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.  
• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,  
Chorus Level, DSP Level  
• DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,  
Chorus Level, DSP Level  
• SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,  
Chorus Level  
• EFFECT:  
Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type,  
Sustain, DSP Type  
• HARMONY:  
Harmony Type, Harmony Volume  
• Performance assistant technology:  
Performance assistant technology Type  
PC Mode  
• PC:  
• MIDI:  
Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,  
Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out  
• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature  
Denominator, Metronome Volume, Bell  
• SCORE:  
• LESSON:  
• UTILITY:  
Quantize  
Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade  
Demo Cancel, Language  
Effects  
• Reverb: 29 types  
• Chorus: 24 types  
• DSP:  
182 types  
• Harmony: 26 types  
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Panel controls and terminals  
Alphabetical order  
A
E
B
F
C
G
H
I
D
K
L
M
150 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
N
O
P
T
TimeSignature  
Q
R
U
V
S
X
DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited Warranty  
90 DAYS LABOR  
1 YEAR PARTS  
Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed  
below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models  
included in the following series of products:  
DGX,YPG SERIES OF Portable Grand ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS  
If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect  
in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.  
If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject  
to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the  
consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as  
warranty replacements.  
THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICHYAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR  
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.  
Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these  
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.  
CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES  
If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:  
1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for  
assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.  
2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or toYamaha with an explanation  
of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts  
under warranty.  
3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.  
*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.  
IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has  
a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.  
4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and  
to follow all safety precautions.  
EXCLUSIONS  
This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to  
failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:  
1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.  
2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an  
authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.  
3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,  
and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.  
Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.  
Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________  
Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________  
(Retailer)  
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
Electronic Service Division  
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue  
Buena Park, CA 90620  
KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FORYOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!  
152 DGX-630/YPG-635 Owner’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha  
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.  
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten  
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen  
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.  
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou  
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.  
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tiendaYamaha más cercana  
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.  
THE NETHERLANDS/  
NORTH AMERICA  
ASIA  
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG  
CANADA  
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,  
Branch Benelux  
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands  
Tel: 0347-358 040  
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.  
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,  
M1S 3R1, Canada  
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.  
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),  
Jingan, Shanghai, China  
Tel: 416-298-1311  
Tel: 021-6247-2211  
FRANCE  
U.S.A.  
HONG KONG  
Yamaha Musique France  
Yamaha Corporation of America  
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,  
U.S.A.  
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.  
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France  
Tel: 01-64-61-4000  
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,  
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
Tel: 2737-7688  
Tel: 714-522-9011  
ITALY  
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.  
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy  
Tel: 02-935-771  
INDONESIA  
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)  
PT. Nusantik  
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA  
MEXICO  
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot  
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia  
Tel: 21-520-2577  
SPAIN/PORTUGAL  
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.  
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,  
Col. Guadalupe del Moral  
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México  
Tel: 55-5804-0600  
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.  
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230  
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain  
Tel: 91-639-8888  
KOREA  
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.  
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,  
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea  
Tel: 080-004-0022  
GREECE  
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House  
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece  
Tel: 01-228 2160  
BRAZIL  
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.  
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,  
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL  
Tel: 011-3704-1377  
MALAYSIA  
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.  
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,  
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia  
Tel: 3-78030900  
SWEDEN  
Yamaha Scandinavia AB  
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053  
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden  
Tel: 031 89 34 00  
ARGENTINA  
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.  
Sucursal de Argentina  
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,  
Buenos Aires, Argentina  
Tel: 1-4371-7021  
PHILIPPINES  
Yupangco Music Corporation  
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,  
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines  
Tel: 819-7551  
DENMARK  
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office  
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark  
Tel: 44 92 49 00  
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN  
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/  
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES  
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.  
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,  
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,  
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá  
SINGAPORE  
FINLAND  
F-Musiikki Oy  
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,  
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland  
Tel: 09 618511  
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.  
#03-11 A-Z Building  
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015  
Tel: 747-4374  
Tel: +507-269-5311  
TAIWAN  
NORWAY  
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.  
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.  
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.  
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB  
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway  
Tel: 67 16 77 70  
EUROPE  
THE UNITED KINGDOM  
Tel: 02-2511-8688  
ICELAND  
Skifan HF  
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.  
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,  
MK7 8BL, England  
THAILAND  
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.  
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor  
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan  
Bangkok 10330, Thailand  
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland  
Tel: 525 5000  
Tel: 01908-366700  
RUSSIA  
Yamaha Music (Russia)  
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii  
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia  
Tel: 495 626 0660  
IRELAND  
Danfay Ltd.  
Tel: 02-215-2626  
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin  
Tel: 01-2859177  
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES  
Yamaha Corporation,  
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group  
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,  
Japan 430-8650  
GERMANY  
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH  
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany  
Tel: +49-4101-3030  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH  
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany  
Tel: 04101-3030  
Tel: +81-53-460-2317  
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,  
Branch Switzerland  
OCEANIA  
AFRICA  
Yamaha Corporation,  
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group  
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,  
Japan 430-8650  
AUSTRALIA  
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland  
Tel: 01-383 3990  
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.  
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,  
Victoria 3006, Australia  
AUSTRIA  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,  
Branch Austria  
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria  
Tel: 01-60203900  
Tel: 3-9693-5111  
Tel: +81-53-460-2312  
NEW ZEALAND  
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.  
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,  
Auckland, New Zealand  
MIDDLE EAST  
TURKEY/CYPRUS  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH  
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany  
Tel: 04101-3030  
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/  
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,  
Branch Austria, CEE Department  
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria  
Tel: 01-602039025  
Tel: 9-634-0099  
COUNTRIES AND TRUST  
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN  
Yamaha Corporation,  
OTHER COUNTRIES  
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group  
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,  
Japan 430-8650  
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE  
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,  
Dubai, United Arab Emirates  
Tel: +971-4-881-5868  
POLAND  
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH  
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce  
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland  
Tel: 022-868-07-57  
Tel: +81-53-460-2312  
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division  
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650  
Tel: +81-53-460-3273  
EKB43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weil McLain Boiler Series 6 User Manual
Weslo Treadmill WLTL 147090 User Manual
Westinghouse Plumbing Product ACB 3200HR User Manual
Whirlpool Trash Compactor TC4700X User Manual
White Rodgers Humidifier HSP2000 User Manual
Wilton Sander Belt And Disc Sander User Manual
Winegard Stud Sensor DE 4600 User Manual
Zanussi Oven ZOB 660 User Manual
Zanussi Refrigerator ZEL 140 W User Manual
Zenoah Brush Cutter BC3400FW User Manual